PROJECT MANUAL - Facilities & Services · 2019. 12. 12. · DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000...

NMSU O’DONNELL HALL RM. 027 RENOVATIONS

December 31, 2019NMSU Project #3715

Desert Peak Project # 206-106

P R O J E C T M A N U A L

Desert Peak Architects, P.C.311 N. Main StreetLas Cruces, NM 88001

The technical material and data contained in the Specifications were prepared under the supervision and direction of the undersigned, whose seal as a Professional Architect, licensed in the State of New Mexico, is affixed above.

All questions about the meaning or intent of these documents shall be submitted only to the Architect of Record, stated above, in writing.

ARCHITECT OF RECORD DATE


P R O J E C T M A N U A L

December 31, 2019NMSU Project #3715 Desert Peak Project # 206-106

Desert Peak Architects, P.C.311 N. Main StreetLas Cruces, NM 88001

Richard Haas, AIA December 31, 2019

12/31/2019

PRELIMIN

ARY - NOT FOR C

ONSTRUCTION


000110 – TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 0 – INVITATION TO BID REQUIREMENTS

Per NMSU Invitation to Bid Document

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 Summary

012300 Alternates

012600 Contract Modification Procedures

012900 Payment Procedures

013100 Project Management Coordination

013200 Construction Progress Documentation

013300 Submittal Procedures

014000 Quality Requirements

015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls

016000 Product Requirements

017300 Execution Requirements

017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

017700 Closeout Procedures

017823 Operation and Maintenance Data

017839 Project Record Documents

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 Selective Demolition

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

Not Applicable

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

Not Applicable

DIVISION 5 - METALS

Not Applicable

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

061053 Miscillaneous Rough Carpentry

064116 Plastic-Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

079200 Joint Sealants



DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

081416 Flush Wood Doors

084113 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts

087100 Finish Hardware

088000 Glazing and Glazing Films

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing

092900 Gypsum Board

093013 Ceramic Tiling

095123 Acoustical Tile Ceilings

096513 Resilient Base

096813 Tile Carpeting

099123 Interior Painting

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101419 Interior Signage

102600 Wall and Door Protection

104416 Fire Extinguishers

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

Not Applicable

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

Not Applicable

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Not Applicable

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

Not Applicable

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

210000 Fire Sprinkler System

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

Not Applicable



DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

230000 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning

230500 Common Work Results for Mechanical

230593 Test and Balance

230700 Insulation for Mechanical Systems

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

260500 Common Work Results for Electrical

260503 Equipment Wiring Connections

260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System

260534 Outlet Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes

260923 Lighting Control Devices & Occupancy Sensors

265100 Interior Lighting

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

270100 Operation and Maintenance of Communications Systems

270500 Common Work Results for Communication

270600 Schedules for Communications

270800 Commissioning of Communications

271000 Structured Cabling

271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings

271300 Communications Backbone Cabling

271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling

271600 Communications Connecting Cords, Devices and Adapters

272000 Data Communications

273000 Voice Communications

274000 Audio-Video Communications

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

Reference Electrical Sheets

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

Not Applicable

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

Not Applicable

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

Not Applicable


SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1

SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.

2. Use of premises.

3. Owner's occupancy requirements.

4. Specification formats and conventions.

5. Work under other contracts.

6. Site cleaning.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: NMSU O’Donnell Hall Rm. 027 Renovations

Desert Peak Architects Project No. 206-106

1. Project Location: O’Donnell Hall - New Mexico State University – 1220 Stewart St., Las

Cruces NM 88001

B. Owner: New Mexico State University, P.O. Box 30001, Las Cruces, NM.

1. Owner's Representative: Orasa Vaught , Project Manager, New Mexico State University,

P.O. Box 30001, MSC 3545, Las Cruces, NM 88003.

C. Architect: Richard Haas, Desert Peak Architects, P.C. 311 N. Main St., Las Cruces, NM.

D. The Work consists of the following:

1. The Base Bid Work includes:

a. Removal and replacement of the existing carpet throughout.

b. Removal and replacement existing base boards

c. Removal and replacement of existing acoustic ceiling and ceiling grid per new

spatial configuration.

d. Removal and replacement of existing light fixtures

e. Re-configuration of existing mechanical system per new spatial configuration.

f. New acoustical wall partitions for diagnostics and observation rooms. New

partitions to be taped and textured to match existing. New paint.

g. Preparation of existing substrates for new paint throughout.

h. New doors and door hardware.

i. New electrical and data per new spatial configuration.

j. Infrastructure for observation equipment. Equipment installation by others.


SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2

2. Alternates:

a. Additive Alternate #1 – New wood-look porcelain floor tile in work area.

E. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.3 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations. Contractor

to coordinate with Owner for site access and allowable areas for construction operations.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated by Owner. Do

not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public.

2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and

available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use

these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout

construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its

occupants during construction period.

D. Schedule of Construction*

1. 01/06/2020– Finalization of CES contract / Notice to Proceed

2. 01/08/2020 – Pre-Construction conference

3. 02/21/2020 – Construction Completion; Certificate of Occupancy

*Schedule for Construction is subject to change.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES

A. Secure and pay for permits, fees, and licenses necessary for execution of Work as applicable at

time of receipt of bids or as otherwise required in other sections of the Specifications.

B. Secure and pay for utility meters, including impact and development fees. Give required

notices.

C. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and other legal requirements of public authorities

which bear on performance of Work.


SUMMARY 01 1000 - 3

1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and portions of the building during entire

construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize

conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-

to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used

facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.

1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the

49-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in

the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.

Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words

shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where

applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.

Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.

Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for

clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by

others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,

are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.8 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried

out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the

Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.


SUMMARY 01 1000 - 4

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction

operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under

this Contract.

C. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied by Owner and installed by Contractor, when

noted, before Substantial Completion.

1.8 SITE CLEANING

A. See Division 2 Section "Site Cleaning" for these requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01100


ALTERNATES 01 2300- 1

SECTION 01 2300 – ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for bid alternates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined

in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if

Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be

completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described

in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the

Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the

Contract Sum.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate

work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part

of alternate.

B. Notification: Prior to award of the Contract, Owner shall confirm if alternates have been

accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Identify Bid Lots separately on the Schedule of Values broken down by category of Work.

E. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections

referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work

described under each alternate.


ALTERNATES 01 2300- 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. Alternates:

a. Additive Alternate #1 – Provide wood-look porcelain floor tile with epoxy grout in

work area.

END OF SECTION 01 2300


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1

SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing

Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time as authorized by the General

Conditions.

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them

instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost

adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data

to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting

an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Limit mark-ups as stipulated in the general conditions.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the

proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to

substantiate quantities.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 2

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,

and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the

Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed

change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Limit mark-ups as stipulated in the general conditions.

C. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Requests and Contractor's fixed price

quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by the Architect.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures

of Owner and Contractor on New Mexico State University Standard Change Order Form.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on

AIA Document G714 as signed by the Owner. Construction Change Directive instructs

Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It

also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the

Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the

Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1

SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and

process Applications for Payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of

Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms

and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets, and


2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than

seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items

for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.

c. Architect's project number.

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project

Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,

where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for

operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and

demonstration and training in the amount of 3 percent of the Contract Sum.

3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

4. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated

and stored, but not yet installed.

5. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

6. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.



a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual

work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of

Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result

in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as

certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: See General Conditions of the Contract.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use New Mexico State University Standard Form – Application

and Certificate for Payment and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for

Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete

applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction

Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last

day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit two copies signed and notarized original copies of each Application for

Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and

similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate

information about application.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of Values.

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).

5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial

Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of

the Work claimed as substantially complete, less amounts for close-out documentation.



1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting

documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the

following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."

5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."

7. Evidence that claims have been settled.

8. Contractor’s "Letter of Warrantee" for a one-year period.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 1

SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Project meetings.

2. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general

installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control

points.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract

Documents.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections, depending on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before

or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure

maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and

repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees

at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts



and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

9. Project closeout activities.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: The Architect will coordinate, and schedule meetings and conferences at Project site,

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Contractor will determine, and inform participants and individuals whose

presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. The Architect will notify the

Owner of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: The Architect will prepare and distribute the meeting agenda to all invited

attendees.

3. Minutes: The Architect will record significant discussions and agreements achieved and

distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, within five days

of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: The Owner will schedule a preconstruction conference before

starting construction, no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the

conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review

responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned

parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the

following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

e. Procedures for RFIs.

f. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

h. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

i. Submittal procedures.

j. Preparation of Record Documents.

k. Use of the premises and existing building.



l. Work restrictions.

m. Owner's occupancy requirements.

n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

o. Construction waste management and recycling.

p. Parking availability.

q. Office, work, and storage areas.

r. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

s. First aid.

t. Security.

u. Progress cleaning.

v. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: The Contractor will conduct a pre-installation conference at

Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect

of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. The Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Review of mockups.

i. Possible conflicts.

j. Compatibility problems.

k. Time schedules.

l. Weather limitations.

m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

n. Warranty requirements.

o. Compatibility of materials.

p. Acceptability of substrates.

q. Temporary facilities and controls.

r. Space and access limitations.

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

t. Testing and inspecting requirements.

u. Installation procedures.

v. Coordination with other work.

w. Required performance results.

x. Protection of adjacent work.

y. Protection of construction and personnel.



3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: The Contractor will conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.

Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these

meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized

to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. The Contractor shall provide an Agenda for each progress meeting

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,

in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to

do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Status of submittals.

4) Deliveries.

5) Off-site fabrication.

6) Access.

7) Site utilization.

8) Temporary facilities and controls.

9) Work hours.

10) Hazards and risks.

11) Progress cleaning.

12) Quality and work standards.

13) Status of correction of deficient items.

14) Field observations.

15) RFIs.

16) Status of proposal requests.

17) Pending changes.

18) Status of Change Orders.



19) Pending claims and disputes.

20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: The Contractor shall record the meeting minutes.

5. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue

revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,

and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the

form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor

will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and

the following:

1. Project name.

2. Date.

3. Name of Contractor.

4. Name of Architect.

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

10. Contractor's signature.

11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.

Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.



f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to

Division 1 Section "Contract Modifications."

D. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response

to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor

disagrees with response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Include the following:

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Architect.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Architect's response was received.

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 1

SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress

of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submittals Schedule.

3. Daily construction reports.

4. Field condition reports.

5. Prevailing wage reports.

6. As-builts.

B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of

construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of

subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required

schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required

by construction schedule. Include time required for review, re-submittal, ordering,

manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and


2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction

Schedule.



2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of

Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an

early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal

element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long

lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities

in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,

approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1

Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in

Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 30 days for startup and testing.

4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its

submission, complete a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change

on the overall project schedule.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. Equipment at Project site.

3. Material deliveries.

4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.

5. Accidents.

6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

7. Meter readings and similar recordings.

8. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

9. Services connected and disconnected.

10. Equipment or system tests and startups.

B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions

and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for

interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly scheduled

progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each

such meeting.

2. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know

schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned

portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

3.2 AS-BUILTS

A. Maintain on site a set of Drawings to document as-built conditions, and keep up-to-date with all

revisions to the work and deviations from the plans. As-built documents shall be reviewed by

the Architect upon the completion of the work.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 1

SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop

Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports.

C. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports.

D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.

E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data.

F. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive

action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress

Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of

related construction activities.



C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as

follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of

the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in

advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner

as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval

markings.

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name and address of Contractor.

e. Name and address of subcontractor.

f. Name and address of supplier.

g. Name of manufacturer.

h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

l. Other necessary identification.

E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract

Documents on submittals.

F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless

Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal

may serve as final submittal.

G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and

handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,

without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED."



I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "APPROVED" taken by

Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are

not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

f. Printed performance curves.

g. Operational range diagrams.

h. Compliance with specified referenced standards.

i. Testing by recognized testing agency.

4. Number of Copies: Submit Product Data digitally, unless otherwise indicated. Architect

will return a copy of the submittal indicating required action, if any. Mark up and retain

one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless

submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions.

b. Identification of products.

c. Fabrication and installation drawings.

d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.

e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring.

f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.



g. Templates and patterns.

h. Schedules.

i. Notation of coordination requirements.

j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 by

36 inches (610 by 915 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal or a digital copy

of each submittal. Architect will return one copy if hard copies are received.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from

manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction

Progress Documentation."

F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a

special design.



2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal or one digital copy, unless

otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that

entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Quality Requirements."

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project

Management and Coordination."

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Construction Progress Documentation."

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience

of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names

and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure

Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include

names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.



L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect

for Project.

M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during

installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and

normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in

Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for

calculations. Include page numbers.

R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents

manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a

product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of

manufacturer.

S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of

insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of

coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to

Architect.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for

compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with

approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and

will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp

and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: When submittals are marked "Approved", that part of the

work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or

corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final

acceptance will depend upon that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Approved as noted", that

part of the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with

notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents;

final acceptance will depend on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittals are marked "Revise and Resubmit", do not

proceed with that part of the work covered by the submittal, including purchasing,

fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance

with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different

action mark.

a. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" to be used at the Project

Site, or elsewhere where work is in progress.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, will return

it if it does not comply with requirements, or return it marked "Action not required". Architect

will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

without review.



E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1

SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and

quality control to be coordinated and paid by the Contractor.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document

requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required

by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of

this Section.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract

enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project

before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or

compliance with specified criteria.

D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a testing agency qualified to

conduct product testing and acceptable to the Owner, to establish product performance and

compliance with industry standards.

E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,

plant, mill, factory, or shop.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.



G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

I. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a

minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with

special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish

different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the

most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision

before proceeding.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this

Project in material, design, and extent.



F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with the experience and capability to

conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with

additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities

having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities

having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities

having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires

testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal

Procedures."

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work.



6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the

following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and

replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas

with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.



TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 1

SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities.

B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements

for products in those Sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is

complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all

openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.

Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not

limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering

and without payment of use charges. Contractor may provide connections and extensions of

services as required for construction operations. Restore sources to as-found or specified

conditions at Contract Closeout.

C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use

without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of

services as required for construction operations. Restore sources to as-found or specified

conditions at Contract Closeout.

D. Telephone Service: Provide telephone service for use by supervisory personnel. Monthly cost

of service shall be paid by the Contractor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for

construction personnel.




A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned

responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Panelized 6 foot high commercial grade chain link fence. Equip with

vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks.

B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous

Carpentry."

C. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by

maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with

ASTM C 36/C 36M.

D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate

materials and equipment for construction operations.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,

self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.



1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for

temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille

in system and remove at end of construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the

Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for

construction.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of

construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,

operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a

harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on



completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as

long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination

for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system.

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all

construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, i.e.

facsimile machine, or computer with access to electronic mail in field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas

adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location

as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within

construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and

paved areas.

2. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, re-

grading, proof-rolling, compacting, and testing.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as

indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking

entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle

waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning

requirements.

G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.



H. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators.

I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders

are not adequate.

J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering

of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that

minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable

effects.

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,

according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Stormwater Control: Comply with storm water pollution prevention plan. Provide barriers in

and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater

from heavy rains.

D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line

of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root

systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and

harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial

Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using

environmentally safe materials.

F. Site Enclosure Fence: When excavation begins, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a

manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined

sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.

G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially

completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,

vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.



I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar

activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate

temporary enclosures.

J. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt

migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,

and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side.

2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.

3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.

4. Protect air-handling equipment.

5. Weather strip openings.

6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with

NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning

sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.

Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than

Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,

clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.



2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1

Section "Closeout Procedures."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 1

SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for

use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on

products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown, or listed in manufacturer's published product

literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or

facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless

explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not

considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal

process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities

related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,

appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other

designation to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of

evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and

title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction that will be necessary to accommodate

proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as

performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and

requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's

letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated

results.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.

B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section

number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product

request.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.




A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously

selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other

losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to

ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.

5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.

6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to

Owner.



2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide

more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular

requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,

that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used

successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make

selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish "salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the

named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for

consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a

product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for

consideration of an unnamed product.



5. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional

requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the

specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"

Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of

manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other

named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,

and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in

Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the

other named manufacturers.

7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established

Sample, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect's decision will be

final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"

Article for proposal of product.

8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected

from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that

complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of

colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,

density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium

items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,

patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or

texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium

items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after

commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at

discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return

requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner

must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect

for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and

similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.



5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.

6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will

return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents, whether consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the

indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 1

SECTION 01 7000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. General installation of products.

4. Progress cleaning.

5. Starting and adjusting.

6. Protection of installed construction.

7. Correction of the Work.

B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final Project Record Documents,

recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and

verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction

affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate

and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting

the Work.

1. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public

utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.



2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or

relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances

located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include

a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the

Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are

discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill

and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and

electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.

Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and

duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log

available for reference by Architect.



3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control

points during construction operations.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,

referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having

jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record

Documents.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated

requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component

securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver

such items to Project site in time for installation.



H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate

progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing

waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.



J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious

exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for

proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification

requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired

without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components

that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 1

SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.

2. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

B. Contractor will provide solid waste and recyclable containers, and bare the associated cost of

disposal.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting

from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes

packaging.

B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,

recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in

preparation for reuse.


A. Waste Management Training: Conduct training at Project site.

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing, and

construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for

estimates.

B. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,

or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of

each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation

procedures.

1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled

materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include

name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.



3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating

recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location

on Project site where materials separation will be located.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION

A. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible

for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management. Coordinator shall be

present at Project site full time for duration of Project.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management

procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

1. Educate entities when they first begin work on-site on waste management effort. Review

procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and

used facilities.

1. Designate specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be

salvaged, recycled, or reused.

2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust

and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate

recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.

1. Contractor will provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable

and solid waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and

unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials

if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,

grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.



3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry

location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.

3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood

pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements

for recycling wood.

B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site.

C. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.

2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. Grind and

arrange for delivery to City of Las Cruces Recycling Center.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

B. Disposal: Contractor will transport waste and recycled materials off property and legally

dispose of them.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 1

SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Videotaping of systems specific training.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.

B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment

for Substantial and Final Completion.

C. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data.

D. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

E. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for

the Work in those Sections.

F. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for systems specific training requirements for the Work in

those Sections.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on

the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar

releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,

damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by

Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.



8. Complete startup testing of systems.

9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, construction tools, and

similar elements.

11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. Provide videotaped training sessions for NMSU employee use for systems

specific training.

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of

request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled

requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection

or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by

Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections

as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final

Completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final

Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be

completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy

of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for

acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements.

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,

Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.

Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor

of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections

as incomplete is completed or corrected.



1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area

affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction

including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and

proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of

the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is

indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the

Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or

installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone

number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title

"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially

hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution

regulations.



B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other

foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other

foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured

surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original

condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish

mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent.

k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or

that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and

electrical nameplates.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and

other foreign substances.

m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure.

o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply

with requirements for new fixtures.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.



C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or

excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous

materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of

lawfully.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 1

SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Emergency manuals.

2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

3. Maintenance instructions for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,

systems and equipment.

B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at 75% project completion. Architect

will return copy with comments within 15 days after initial submittal.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 1 hard

copy and one digital copy of each corrected manual within 10 days of receipt of

Architect's comments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.

6. Name and address of Architect.

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.



C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed

to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project

Manual.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with

clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside

covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of

contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each

tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of

equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification

Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic

software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and

use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in

manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,

and drawing locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency

instructions, and emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component for

fire, gas leak, water leak, power failure, water outage, and equipment failure.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for

notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type

of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and

required sequences for electric or electronic systems.



2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating

procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal

shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and

required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and

sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection

procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and

maintenance, and repair instructions.



E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and

related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service

contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of

parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of

equipment:

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,

disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions, that detail essential maintenance

procedures:

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine

maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local

sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies

indicated.



B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each

product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a

tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.

Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to

ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record

Documents prior to certification for final payment, and within 30 days of Substantial

Completion, including the following:

1. Record Drawings (As-built).

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.

B. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of

the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Near Substantial Completion of Work, submit one set of

marked-up Record Prints completed from original Contract Documents that are

acceptable to the Architect.

b. Final Submittal: Architect will prepare the final Record Drawings submittal to the

Owner.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and

contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings

and Shop Drawings marked prominently as "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS".

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,



whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the

marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion,

review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. All final and revised as-built drawings and

close-out documents are to be delivered to the Architect with delivery of the Substantial

Completion document. The Architect will prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the

Contract Drawings.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where

applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where

applicable.



2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file

miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project

Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as

they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project

Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and

in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to

Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 1

SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building

2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent

damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and

that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and

reinstalled.

1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as

far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding

with selective demolition.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

F. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered within the

work area. Contractor to stop work and inform the Owner/Architect immediately upon

discovery of hazardous materials within the work area.



1.4 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of

selective demolition required.

B. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.

Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in

Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems

serving areas to be selectively demolished where indicated in the drawings.

1. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from equipment to be selectively demolished, if any,

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.



3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of

governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and

chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to

remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden

space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression

devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be salvaged, or otherwise indicated to

remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of

them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.



3. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste

Management."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.



MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking and nailers.

2. Wood furring.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is

indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal unless otherwise

indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not

in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board

of Review.

D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.



1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in

contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior

masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or

unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread

index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant

progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame

front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during

the test.

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to

accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where

indicated.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where

exterior type is not indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to

ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to

ASTM D 6841.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing

agency.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: [Construction or No. 2] [Construction, Stud, or No. 3]

[Standard, Stud, or No. 3] grade of any species.

B. Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade of species:

1. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB.

2. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

3. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.



2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Furring.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. Utility Shelving: Lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of eastern white pine,

Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA,

NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

D. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of [any of the following] [the

following] species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.

3. Northern species, [No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.

4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in

this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,

or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, length as

recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying

with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl

rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded

polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame

Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit

carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar

supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities

requiring backing panels.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated

lumber.

F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying

with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-

Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite

protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet

installation.

2. Panel, finish and hardware products for plastic laminate faced architectural cabinets.

3. Solid Surface Countertop Materials

4. Miscellaneous Materials

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products and cabinet hardware and

accessories.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices, and other components.

D. Samples:

1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

2. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

3. Solid surface countertop finish

4. Drawer pulls, slides and hinges


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork

Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,

finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide [labels] [and] [certificates] from [AWI] [WI] certification program indicating

that woodwork[, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

B. Grade: [Custom / Economy].

C. Type of Construction: [Frameless]

D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: [Reveal overlay]

E. Reveal Dimension: [1/4 inch (13 mm)]

F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as

required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Formica Corporation

2. Wilsonart LLC

3. Lab Designs Architectural Laminates

G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: [Grade HGS]

2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.

3. Vertical Surfaces: [Grade VGS].

4. Pattern Direction: [Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels]

H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: [High-pressure decorative laminate,

NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS]

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: [Solid-hardwood lumber]

3. Drawer Bottoms: [Hardwood plywood]

I. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and

drawers unless located directly under tops.

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures

of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.

2. Match Architect's sample.

3. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range.



2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard

for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of

referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless

otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay].

4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.

5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with

requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated,

use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing

identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

1. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of

qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that

will be concealed from view after installation.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less

when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion

when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more

than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and

15 percent, respectively.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural

cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive

Specification)."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, [135] degrees of

opening



C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid [metal] [5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm)

deep, and 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter].

E. Catches: [Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141] [Push-in magnetic catches,

BHMA A156.9, B03131]

F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: [BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081]

G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; [metal]

H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted[ and extending under bottom edge of drawer];

[full-extension] [partial-extension] type; [zinc-plated steel] [epoxy-coated steel] with

polymer rollers.

2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; [full-extension] type; zinc-plated-

steel ball-bearing slides.

3. For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm)

wide, provide [Grade 1].

4. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high

and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide [Grade 1]

5. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide,

provide [Grade 1HD-100]

6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide [Grade 1]

7. For trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide,

provide [Grade 1HD-100]

I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to

less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-

metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.



2.6 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with

ANSI SS1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of

the following

a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.

b. Avonite Surfaces.

c. Formica Corporation.

d. LG Chemical, Ltd.

e. Meganite Inc.

f. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc.

g. Swan Corporation (The).

h. Transolid, Inc.

i. Wilsonart International.

.

2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner

3. Endsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.

C. Countertops: 1/2-inch thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same

material over ¾” MDF substrate.

D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch thick, solid surface material integrated into countertop.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent

possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for

shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for

scribing, trimming, and fitting.

B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work,

and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to

produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and

burrs.

C. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in

GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation

areas.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install

level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at

cuts.

D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails[ or finishing

screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide

unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a

straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16

inches o.c. with [No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch

penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips] [No. 10 wafer-head

sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish]

[toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish].



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.

3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.

4. Latex joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing

indicated.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated

below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific

joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint

sealants to joint substrates.

2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in

contact with glazing and gasket materials.

3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact

with stone or masonry substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to

Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint



Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or

replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements

specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by NMSU Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS ASTM C 920

A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, non-sag, plus 100 percent and minus 50

percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.

b. Pecora Corporation; 890.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrum 1

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, non-sag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and

minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.

b. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.

B. Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, non-sag, plus 100 percent and minus 50

percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.






C. Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT.




D. Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent

movement capability nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS,

Class 50, Use NT.

a. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270.

b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.

E. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M,

Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT.

a. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270.

b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.

2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide

to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component,

nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing

silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

C. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.

b. Bostik, Inc; Chem-Calk 600.

c. May National Associates, Inc; Bondaflex 600.

d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.

e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc; SM 8200.

2. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834



2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative

assemblies according to ASTM E 90

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C closed-cell material with a surface skin

Type O (open-cell material, Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin)] [ or any of

the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint

application indicated], and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise

contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.



B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation

instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing

begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling

agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or

adjacent surfaces.

1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and

joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each

floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.



Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated

requirements.

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Existing conditions requiring new sealant to be considered incidental to the work.

b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT.

3. Joint Sealant: Silicone

4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by NMSU Architect from manufacturer's full range

of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions.

b. Existing conditions requiring new sealant to be considered incidental to the work.

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex


of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces

not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Existing conditions requiring new sealant to be considered incidental to the work.

b. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows.

d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.


of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.




2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.


of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Aluminum thresholds.

b. Sill plates.


2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.


of colors.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,

preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for

details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled

by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive

pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.

2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.



3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.

4. Commercial Door and Hardware, Inc.

5. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.

6. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.

7. Firedoor Corporation.

8. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.

9. Habersham Metal Products Company.

10. Kewanee Corporation (The).

11. Mesker Door Inc.

12. Pioneer Industries, Inc.

13. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.

14. Security Metal Products Corp.

15. Southwestern Hollow Metal.

16. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

17. Windsor Republic Doors.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based

on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and

labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance

with NFPA 105.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection

ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and

Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors: At locations indicated on the Door and Frame Schedule

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).

c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.

d. Edge Construction: Model 1 Full Flush.

e. Core: Polyisocyanurate

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.



b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent

door frame.

c. Construction: Fully Welded

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. At locations indicated in the Door

and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches .

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with

minimum A40 coating.

d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush

e. Core: Polyisocyanurate.

3. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value)

of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

4. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with

minimum A40 coating.

b. Construction: Fully Welded.

5. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.5 BORROWED LITES

A. Hollow-metal frames of metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

B. Construction: Fully Welded.

2.6 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not

less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches

wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042

inch thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as

follows:



1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable

for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of

scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill

phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

I. Glazing: Section 088000 "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film

thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,

fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly

identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal

as frames.



1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face

seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at

crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be

grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per

anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at

bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of

frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as

follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of

frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.

3) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to

SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where

indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-

metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each

glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors

and frames.



4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation

types indicated.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed

lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-

HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving

surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;

grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.

f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout.

5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber

insulation.



6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible

on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees

from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified

below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch .

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch .

d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-

metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not

more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after

installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint

according to manufacturer's written instructions.



E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in

painting Sections.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.

2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;

construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.

2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.

4. Undercuts.

5. Requirements for veneer matching.

6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.

D. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by

an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."

C. Forest Certification: Provide doors made with not less than 70 percent of wood products

obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with

FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a

qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive

pressure according to UL 10C.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

2. Ampco, Inc.

3. Buell Door Company Inc.

4. Chappell Door Co.

5. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.

6. Eggers Industries.

7. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.

8. Haley Brothers, Inc.

9. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood.

10. Ipik Door Company.

11. Lambton Doors.

12. Marlite.

13. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

14. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.

15. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.

16. Poncraft Door Company.

17. Vancouver Door Company.

18. VT Industries Inc.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's and WI's

"Architectural Woodwork Standard.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with

requirements of grades specified.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.

2. Extra Heavy Duty: public toilets, janitor's closets and utility rooms.

C. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1, made with binder containing no urea-

formaldehyde.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate

through-bolting hardware.



2.3 VENEER FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces

B. Species: Red Oak to match existing. Finish color to match existing as approved by architects

C. Cut: Rotary Cut

D. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match

E. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-Balance match

F. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions

G. Core: Glued wood stave

H. Construction: Five or Seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is

abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of

referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.5 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with

one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099123 Interior Painting.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,

including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,

before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be

omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium.

2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane



3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Stain to match

existing as confirmed by Architect.

4. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 Door Hardware.

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and

referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.

2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated

below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for

fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and

mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8

inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless

otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from

bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at

Project site.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. interior storefront framing.

2. Storefront framing for punched openings.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.




1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-

emitting materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor

barriers.

D. Samples: For each exposed finish required.

E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing

fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from

manufacturer.

B. Product test reports.



C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample warranties.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated [ and

accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with

ISO/IEC 17025.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated

by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they

relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to

Architect for review.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or

replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within

specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wind Loads: Provide storefront system, including, but not limited to, anchorage, capable of

withstanding wind load design pressures of 20 psf.Retain "Delegated Design" Paragraph below

if Contractor is required to assume responsibility for design.



B. Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.060 cfm (0.00003 m3/s) per square foot (0.09 m2) (projected

area of module) at 6.24 psf (299 Pa) static air pressure differential, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E283.

C. Water Leakage: There shall be no uncontrolled water entry at 12 psf (575 Pa) test pressure as

defined in AAMA 501.

D. Thermal Cycling: There shall be no buckling, stress on glass, edge seal failure, excess stress on

structure, anchors and fasteners, or reduction in performance when tested in accordance with

AAMA 501.5 at a temperature range of 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C) to 180 degrees F

(82 degrees C).

E. Structural Performance: Structural performance shall be based on a maximum allowable

deflection of L/175 of the clear span for spans up to 13’-6” (4115 mm) or L/240 of clear span

plus 1/4 inch (6 mm) for spans greater than 13’-6” (4115 mm), or an amount that restricts edge

deflection of individual glazing lites of glass to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is smaller. The

system shall perform to those criteria under the wind load specified for this Project.

F. Thermal Transmittance: Thermal transmittance due to conduction (Uc) shall not be greater than

0.71 Btu/hour/ft2/°F, per AAMA 1503. Condensation resistance factor (CRF) for the frame shall

not be less than 35 and for the glass CRF shall be not less than 56, per AAMA 1503.

G. Thermal Transmittance: Thermal transmittance due to conduction (Uc) shall not be greater than

0.46 Btu/hour/ft2/°F poured and debridged only (or 0.63 Btu/hour/ft2/°F slotted only) per

AAMA 1503. Condensation resistance factor (CRF) shall not be less than 54 (poured and

debridged only) per AAMA 1503.

1. Azon® Thermal Pocket Lance: A mechanical lock between the polyurethane material and

aluminum provided by an approved applicator who shall adhere to strict quality control procedures and testing to qualify for the 10 year warranty against failure of the thermal

barrier polymer due to dry shrinkage and fracturing.

H. Seismic Cycling: There shall be no life/safety type failures (glass breakage, anchor failures,

structural damage, etc.) when tested in accordance with AAMA 501.4, seismic test (lateral

cycling).

I. Sound Rating: The system shall have a sound transmission class (STC) rating of 32 and an

outdoor-indoor transmission class (OITC) rating of 26 when tested in accordance with

ASTM E90, ASTM E413 and ASTM E1332.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Product specified is “T14000 Series Flush Glaze,” center-glazed system,

2 inches (51 mm) by 4-1/2 inches (114 mm), as manufactured by Tubelite, Inc. Items specified

are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Equivalent

products by listed manufacturers are acceptable. The Architect will be the sole judge of the

basis of what is equivalent.



2.3 MATERIALS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded

2.4 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration

of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or

grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.

6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to

Shop Drawings.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M10-C21-A41 complying with AAMA 611.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:



1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose

or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200

"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust

weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather

stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware

according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed

fasteners to greatest extent possible.



GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for

a. Windows

b. Doors

c. storefront framing

2. Films for glazing

3. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and

face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12

inches square.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and

design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer

responsible for their preparation.

F. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.


GLAZING 088000 - 2

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant,

gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with

elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant

products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace

coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated

glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or

to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects

include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass

breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written

instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision

through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. One-way glazing film and translucent frosted window film: Acceptable Manufacturer: 3M

Commercial Solutions, which is located at: 3M Center Bldg. 220-12-E-04; St. Paul, MN 55144-

1000; Toll Free Tel: 888-650-3497; Tel: 651-737-1081; Fax: 651 737 8241. Substitutions

permitted as approved by Architect.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and

under conditions indicated determined according to the International Building Code and

ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.


GLAZING 088000 - 3

3. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part

of the glass.

4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential

shading within individual glass lites.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with

16 CFR 1201, Category II.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated

below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these

publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped

Glazing."

4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with

certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,

thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IgCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies

with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-

strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with

"Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated,

provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with

"Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide

fully tempered float glass.


GLAZING 088000 - 4

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-6mm (1/4”)

annealed or tempered as required.

2.5 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to

bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with

interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to

comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 GLAZING FILMS

A. One-Way Mirror film: One-Way Mirror film with a highly reflective, opaque mirror-like

appearance on one side and a non-reflective, transparent appearance on the other side.

1. Appearance: Silver reflective front, Black non-reflective back

2. Visible light transmitted – 7%

3. Visible light reflected interior – 64%

4. Visible Light reflected exterior – 18%

5. Thickness: 2 mil

B. Translucent Frosted film: decorative finish to control light and privacy while enhancing interior

aesthetics.

1. Basis of Design Product: FASARA Glass Finishes – Luce, as manufactured by 3M

2. Ultraviolet Transmittance: 0%

3. Visible Light Transmittance: 34%

4. Visible Light Reflectance – Interior: 31%

5. Solar Heat Reflectance: 23%

6. Shading Coefficient at 90 Degrees: .59

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,

including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,

under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer

based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at

time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range.


GLAZING 088000 - 5

2.8 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric

tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer

rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and

complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.

3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive

on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant

performance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from

Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or

impair appearance.


GLAZING 088000 - 6

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to

requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to

make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and

installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners

and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without


GLAZING 088000 - 7

developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket

manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-

glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass

lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding

into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and

backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance

for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of

dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,

remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type 1, 2.: Clear annealed or tempered as required.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm .

2. Safety glazing where required.

3. Glazing films as shown on drawings


GLAZING 088000 - 8


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.

2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.




A. Evaluation reports for firestop tracks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless


2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 Gauge 0.0269 inch.



b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide[one of] the following:

1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a

positive attachment of studs to runners while allowing 2-inch minimum vertical

movement.

2. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in

thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner

and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide

lateral bracing.

3. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer

runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

4. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with

movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;

in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with

minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 gauge 0.0296 inches.


H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound

transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch

wide flanges.


2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-

steel thickness of 0.0329 inch.

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch diameter

wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch diameter wire.



J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inch, wall attachment

flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit

insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch diameter wire,

or double strand of 0.048-inch diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or

strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater

than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M

conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated

according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by

testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538

inch and minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch

wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 gauge 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm).

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep members designed to reduce sound

transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped].

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.



1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide[ one of] the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply

to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063

that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that

apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely

fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to



terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above

ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished

assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to

underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-

rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6

inches o.c.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing.

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in

place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 16 inches o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall

with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven

fasteners spaced 16 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange

extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring

channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more

than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.



G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by

building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension

system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of

trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,

and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching

to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for

structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or

otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.

6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms.

7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet

measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between

parallel members that will receive finishes.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Texture finishes.



B. Samples: For each texture finish indicated on same backing indicated for Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an

independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agent.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following

a. American Gypsum Co.

b. BPB America Inc.

c. G-P Gypsum.

d. Lafarge North America Inc.

e. National Gypsum Company.



f. PABCO Gypsum.

g. TempleInland.

h. USG Corporation

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



E. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant

core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch Type X.


3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-

resistive capability.

1. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.


2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-

faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. Bullnose bead.

c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.

f. Expansion (control) joint.

g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.



2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and

removable strip covering slot opening.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.

3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,

use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping

compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,

sandable topping compound.

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel

manufacturer.

2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum

panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag

wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative

assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders."

2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish

with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to

ASTM E 84.

1. Texture: match existing texture

C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray

application.

1. Texture: match existing texture



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

B. Comply with ASTM C 840.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim

where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces

with acoustical sealant.

D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for

panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prefill open joints[, rounded or beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.

3. Level 3: None.

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior

Painting."

5. Level 5: All locations not noted above.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior

Painting."

H. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for

use as exposed soffit board.

I. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces

receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.



B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a

uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of

thin application or of application patterns.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.



CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1

SECTION 093013 – CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain Floor tile.

2. Floor transition strips.



B. Samples:

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and

composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

3. Stone thresholds.

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and

that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount

installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installation work shall conform to the standards set forth in the ltest version ANSI

A108/118 and the TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Instalations

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for

types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI

A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by

TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements

specified.

2.2 FLOOR TILE PRODUCTS

A. Tile Type PT: Porcelain floor tile.

1. Daltile Corporation, Saddle Brook XT Collection

2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.

3. Face Size: 6” x 36” nominal

4. Thickness: 5/16”

5. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.

6. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full

range.

7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable

and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected

from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose, module size 4 by 16.

b. External Corners: none

c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle

pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle


e. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose, module size 4 by 16.

f. External Corners: none

g. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle


2.3 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Comply with pertinent recommendation contained in the latest Tile Council of America

“Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.”

B. Setting material used will conform to the ANSI 118.4 standard or greater and be recommended

by the selected manufacture for the installation and setting for ceramic or porcelain tile based on

the application requirements.



2.4 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations

indicated.

B. Metal Transition Strips: Aluminum transition strips, height to match tile and adjacent floor

material thickness. Transition strip Basis of Design: Reno-T as manufactured by Schluter.

1. Finish: Satin Nickel Anodized Aluminum

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are

incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other

substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances

required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates for wall tiles installed with adhesives or thinset

mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-

setting material manufacturer.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and

packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to

manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA

installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the

ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA

installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and

grouting materials used.



1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Tile walls in wet areas.

b. Tile walls consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other

penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that tiles are

flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize

the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Ceramic Tile: 3/16 inch. Reference manufacturer’s recommendations for specific tile

size and pattern.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above

them.



ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 1

SECTION 095000 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Acoustical ceiling panels

2. Exposed grid suspension system

3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle molding

4. Perimeter Trim

B. Alternates

1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed

product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the

date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent

upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will

be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products that have not

been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional

compensation.

2. Submittals that do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be

considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section,

including but not necessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers

(if specified in Section 1.5); Underwriters' Laboratories Classified Acoustical

performance; Panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; Suspension system

component profiles and sizes; Compliance with the referenced standards.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and

suspension system required.

B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples

of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings show locations of items that are to be

coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.

E. Acoustical Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified

requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and



standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved

independent laboratory classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.

1. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's

Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall

be required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an

independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's

discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's current published values must

be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the

Contractor performing the work.

F. Warranty information

G. Maintenance information


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single

manufacturer.

1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate

markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with

ASTM E 1264 Classification.

3. Fire Resistance: As follows tested per ASTM E119 and listed in the appropriate floor or

roof design in the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory

B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work

including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical

systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in

a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct

sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a

stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems. A majority of the



existing ceiling grid is to remain in the project. Delegated design engineer to assess the seismic

restraints of the existing ceiling and recommend corrections as required.

B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 WARRANTY

1. Acoustic Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to

repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not

limited to the following:

a. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping

b. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects

2. Warranty Period:

a. Acoustical panels: One (1) year from date of substantial completion

b. Grid: One (1) year from date of substantial completion

3. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under

other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent

with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract

Documents.

2.3 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that

match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with

appropriate labels.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of

amount installed.

2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension

component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL TILES

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply

with ASTM E 1264.

1. Basis of Design: Calla Tegular Smooth Texture as manufactured by Armstrong Ceiling

and Wall Solutions.

B. Classification: Type A

C. Surface Texture: Smooth



D. Composition: Wet formed mineral fiber with acoustically transparent membrane

E. Color: White

F. Size: 24” x 24”

G. Edge Profile: 15/16” Square Tegular

H. Mold/Mildew Protection – Ceiling panels with BioBlock performance resist the growth of mold

and mildew

I. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton

35

J. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton

0.9

K. Flame Spread: ASTM E84 and CAN/ULC S102 surface burning characteristics. Flame Spread

Index of 25 or less. Smoke Developed Index of 50 or less (UL labeled)

L. Light Reflectance (LR) White Panel: ASTM E 1477; 0.86

M. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus

N. Recycle Content: 50%

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Seismic Secure Suspension System - 15/16 inch Classic Stab System

2. Color: Blizzard White

B. Metal Suspension-System – Basis of Design: 15/16” Prelude XL as manufactured by Armstrong

Ceiling and Wall Solutions, direct-hung, fully concealed, metal suspension system that complies

with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

C. Direct-Hung, Double-Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and

capped with cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip

galvanized, G30 coating designation.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. Access: Upward, with initial access openings of size indicated below and located

throughout ceiling within each module formed by main and cross runners, with additional

access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles.

a. Initial Access Opening: In each module, 24 by 24 inches.



2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

B. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical tiles in-place

during a seismic event.

2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying with seismic

design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used

for of suspension-system runners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders unless


B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. Install suspended acoustical tile ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M, seismic design

requirements, and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

C. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Replace damaged and broken panels.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension

members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish

damage. Remove any ceiling products that cannot be successfully cleaned and or repaired.

Replace with attic stock or new product to eliminate evidence of damage.



C. Before disposing of ceilings, contact the Armstrong Recycling Center at 877-276-7876, select

option #1 then #8 to review with a consultant the condition and location of building where the

ceilings will be removed. The consultant will verify the condition of the material and that it

meets the Armstrong requirements for recycling. The Armstrong consultant with provide

assistance to facilitate the recycle of the ceiling.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base and accessories

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12

inches long.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. FloorScore Compliance: Rubber base shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standards.

2.2 THERMOSET- RUBBER BASE

A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufactures offering

products that may incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.

1. Tarkett

2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

3. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.

4. Flexco, Inc.

5. Forbo Flooring, Inc.

6. Johnsonite.

7. Roppe Corporation, USA

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,

homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. 4” cove base at all locations noted on interior room finish schedule.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches.



E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

H. Colors: As selected by NMSU Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product

manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread

manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-

tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to

ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by

manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed

with installation only after substrate passes test.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to

manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3

lb. of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative

humidity level.



C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are

to be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

products.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Stair Accessories:

1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.

2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.



3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint

between units.

C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would

otherwise be exposed.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.



- 1 -

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular carpet tile.

1.1 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturer

1. The carpet manufacturer shall have no less than fifteen years of production experience

with modular carpet similar to type specified. Published product literature of carpet

manufacturer shall clearly indicate compliance of products with requirements of this

section.

2. Commitment to quality - carpet manufacturer shall provide verification of its

registration to the ISO 9001/9002 Quality Management System.

3. Commitment to Environmental sustainability - carpet manufacturer shall demonstrate

environmental responsibility through programs of source reduction, recycling, reuse,

water conservation and conservation of raw material usage; and registration in the ISO

14001 Environmental Management System.

4. Response to RFQ shall be accompanied by a letter confirming compliance signed off by

an Officer of the Company.

5. All products offered by the manufacturer meeting environmental standards provided in

this specification shall be “standard running line” products and shall be available with

no minimum order (single box availability) and require no overage. Manufacturer shall

guarantee availability of post-consumer content product in fiber and backing,

individually.

B. Installation Provider

1. The installation provider shall be directly responsible for the quality of the completed

floorcovering installation, including the quality of both the materials and labor used in

the installation. The installation provider shall directly warrant to owner that all

products, materials and services related to the floorcovering installation (including any

floorcovering(s), or other products or materials used in the installation) meeting

specifications set forth herein. The product warranty required herein shall be provided

directly by the carpet manufacturer.

2. The installation provider shall have successful carpet installation experience on work

similar to the work of this Section.

1.2 Submittals – Please submit each of the following with your bid (unless otherwise noted):

A. Manufacturer’s Data - Two (2) copies of carpet manufacturer’s construction specifications,

performance specification, environmental performance and installation instructions for carpet

and related items specified.


- 2 -

B. Fiber Verification – Certification from the fiber producer verifying use of the premium

branded type 6,0 fiber or type 6,6.

C. Premium branded fibers are identified as Universal or Aquafil fibers extruded by

independent fiber producers and having a modification ratio between 1.7 and 2.4. Fibers

extruded by carpet mills will be considered “non-premium” for purposes of this specification.

D. All applicable product warranties provided by manufacturer.

E. Installation provider’s proof of insurance, copy of contractor’s license, and worker’s

compensation certificate.

F. Five (5) current project references for installation provider, with scope, date, and customer

contact with phone number in compliance letter.

G. Samples – Customary (standard) size carpet samples of each type of carpet, in each specified

pattern, color, and construction.

H. Any alternatives to specified product(s) or approved manufacturers, to be considered, shall be

submitted for approval at least ten (10) working days prior to bid or proposal to be

considered. Architect reserves the right to reject proposed substitutions.

I. Maintenance Instructions - Two (2) copies of the manufacturer’s carpet maintenance

instructions.

J. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where

cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.

3. Type of subfloor.

4. Type of installation.

5. Pattern of installation.

6. Pattern type, location, and direction.

7. Pile direction.

8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.

9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.

10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

1.3 Warranty

A. Provide the following written warranties by carpet manufacturer for a period of not less than

15 years:

1. Wear - Surface fiber wear shall not be more than 10% by weight in 15 years. (Note:

Wear warranty of acceptable manufacturer shall not require use of chair pads and

lifetime warranties are not acceptable.)

2. Static - Static generation shall be less than 3.0 kV at 70º F, and 20% R.H.

3. No delamination


- 3 -

4. No edge ravel

5. No dimensional instability (i.e., shrinkage, curling and doming) which adversely affect

the ability of the tile to lie flat

B. Submit manufacturer’s National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP)

certified test results to show that carpet meets or exceeds product performance specification

criteria for carpet testing requirements under Section 2.1 hereof.

C. Installation provider shall warrant all installation services will be free from defects in

workmanship for a period of at least one (1) year following their completion, and that in the

event of defective services, the installation provider will re-perform the affected services and,

as necessary, supply new products of the same or similar grade sufficient to repair or replace

products adversely affected.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Modular Carpet Tile Performance Standards. Basis of Design: J + J Flooring Group: Fiction:

Color: As selected by the Architect from product line’s full range. Modular carpet tile shall meet the

following performance standards:

01. Carpet Flammability

.1 Pill Test (ASTM D2859 or

CPSC FF-1-70)

Passes

.2 Radiant Panel Test (ASTM E648) > 0.45 watts/cm2, Class 1

0.2 Smoke Density (ASTM E662) < 450 Flaming Mode

0.3 Dimensional Stability (Aachen Method

Din 54318)

< 0.1% change

0.4 Static Generation at 70º F (AATCC 134

w/ neolite)

< 2.5 kV at 20% R.H.

0.5 Lightfastness (AATCC 16E) ≥ 4.0 after 60 hours

0.6 Gas Fade (AATCC 23) 4

0.7 Ozone Fade (AATCC 109) 4

0.8.1 Antimicrobial (ASTM E2471-05) The carpet primary backing should display a

minimum performance rating of "CI" (complete

inhibition) or "PI" high (partial inhibition high <

10% coverage) against the three challenge

microorganisms

0.8.2 Antimicrobial (AATCC 174, Part II) > 90.0% reduction

0.9 Fungicidal (AATCC 174, Part III) No growth

0.10 Soil/Stain Protection (AATCC 175-

1991)

> 8.0 on the Red 40 Stain Scale

0.11 Sustainable Carpet Assessment

Standard – NSF/ANSI 140

Platinum, as certified by 3rd party

0.12 Carpet & Rug Institute Green Label

Plus

Any and all products shall pass Carpet & Rug

Institute Green Label Plus. Certification number

of the specified product category shall accompany

submittal.


- 4 -

2.2 Product Construction Specification. Modular carpet tile shall meet the following construction

specifications:

1. Fiber Type: Encore SD Ultima (with recycled content)

2. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed

3. Construction: Tufted Patterned Loop

4. Patterning: Integrated (topical application or wet printed patterning not allowed)

5. Texture: Textured Loop or Cut and Loop

6. Minimum Gauge: 1/12

7. Primary Backing: Nexus Modular

8. Soil/Stain Resistance: ProTex Soil ReleasApplication by fiber producer and manufacturer

required.

9. Standard Adhesive: Commercial Premium Modular Adhesive

10. Antimicrobial: Antifungal and Antibacterial ASTM E 2471-05 Standard Test Method for

Use of Seeded Agar for Screening Assessment of Antimicrobial Activity in Carpet.

Minimum allowable growth ratings on washed and unwashed carpet samples after 72

hours incubation are complete to partial inhibition (<10% sample coverage) on shaven

primary and unshaven fiber layers. Or, if AATCC 174 Parts II & III (AATCC 171

Washed) is used, shall pass both Part II and Part III of AATCC 174 with a minimum of

90% reduction both gram negative and gram positive bacteria and no visible growth

against the fungi.

2.3 Environmental Specifications

.1 Recycled Content by total product weight: minimum of 35%.

.2 Recycled versus Recyclable – Primary consideration will be given to carpet products in the

following order of priority: (A) use of post consumer recycled content in both fiber and

backing, (B) post consumer recycled content in the backing, (C) 100% recyclable product.

Claims shall meet the Federal Trade Commission Part 260 -- Guides for the Use of

Environmental Marketing Claims.

.3 Product platform shall have a 3rd party verified Environmental Product Declaration following

ISO 14025 guidelines and a 3rd party verified Life Cycle Assessment following ISO 14040

guidelines.

.4 Carbon footprint of the Product – Submission shall state the average quantity of greenhouse

gas emissions associated with the entire life cycle of the product from raw material extraction

through end-of-life, a description of the emission reduction credits used to offset the global

warming footprint, and the name of the 3rd party verifying these claims.

2.4 Minimum Antimicrobial Construction Standards in Addition to Product Specifications


- 5 -

.1 Antimicrobial preservative, registered by the EPA for use in carpeting, with broad spectrum

efficacy against the growth of bacteria and fungi for a minimum of 15 years, assuming proper

maintenance. The antimicrobial ingredient shall meet standards set by the U.S. General

Services Administration (GSA) for Antimicrobial Carpet as supported by independent lab

testing less than six months old.

.1 Manufacturer shall provide a stamped EPA technical data sheet for carpet.

Antimicrobial preservative shall contain no arsenic, formaldehyde or heavy metals

(tin, lead, mercury, silver, copper or zinc), be non-halogenated (no fluorine, chlorine,

bromine or iodine) and non-phenolic. Blends of amine neutralized phosphated esters

are preferable. Antimicrobial shall have low water solubility (30ppm), a vapor

pressure of 12mm Hg at 27º C, and an oral LD50 toxicity rate less than 2.4 grams/kg.

.2 The Antimicrobial preservative shall be incorporated into the primary backing of the

product during the manufacturing process, not topically applied to the carpet fibers.

.3 The antimicrobial treated carpet when new shall pass GSA parameters for treated

carpets via AATCC method 174 parts II and III. Initial performance shall be 90%

reduction of the microorganisms (Staphylococcus aureus 6538 and Klebsiella

pneumoniae 4352) and no fungal growth on either the primary backing or fibers both

on washed (AATCC method 174) and non-washed samples. The Standard Test

Method for Use of Seeded Agar for Screening Assessment of Antimicrobial Activity

in Carpet (ASTM E 2471-05) may be used in lieu of AATCC method 174 parts II and

III.

.4 The antimicrobial treated carpet shall maintain, for the warranted life of the carpet, a

minimum of 90% reduction of the microorganisms (Staphylococcus aureus 6538 and

Klebsiella pneumoniae 4352) listed in AATCC method 174 part II, provided the

carpet is maintained as specified. Additionally, the antimicrobial treated carpet shall

maintain a "no macroscopic growth" rating against Aspergillus niger 6275 at the

primary backing in accordance with AATCC 174 part III.

.5 The preservative shall be biodegradable and not toxic to non-target species.

.6 Efficacy of the preservative should be documented in professional peer reviewed

scientific publications.

2.5 Related Carpet Materials

.1 Leveling compound - Latex type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. Shall be

compatible with carpet and curing/sealing compound on concrete.

.2 Glue - Installation shall be free of glue (sprayed or spread)

.3 Installation connectors - Compounded acrylic adhesive, applied to PET polyester backing

with PET polyester release liner (clear 3” x 3” polyester squares with small quantity of a

pressure sensitive adhesive applied on one side of the polyester film). The squares connect

the carpet modules together to form a stable surface over hard surface. The connectors shall

contain no liquid components, have “zero” calculated VOC’s and help to minimize floor prep

in all future installations.


- 6 -

.4 Carpet edge guard, non-metallic - Extruded or molded heavy duty vinyl or rubber carpet edge

guard of size and profile indicated, and with minimum two inch wide anchorage flange;

colors selected by architect/designer from among standard colors available within the

industry.

.5 Ancillary materials - To be selected by installation provider to meet specifications and project

requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Pre-Installation Requirements

.1 All existing carpet and existing carpet waste shall be reused or recycled. A reclamation plan

shall be submitted that will provide directions for the reclamation of all carpet at the job site.

Carpet recycling options consist of:

.1 Repurposing - reusing the product in another application such as facilitating the

donation of used carpeting to charities and other nonprofit organizations.

.2 Closed Loop Recycling - turning waste materials into new materials of the same

value, such as vinyl backing into vinyl backing and nylon yarn into nylon carpet yarn.

.3 Open Loop Recycling – creating other product types from reclaimed carpet. For

example, turning nylon face fiber into automotive parts or carpet padding, including

nylon face fiber in recycled backings.

.4 Waste-to-Energy - using carpet for waste-to-energy. In the case of waste-to-energy,

manufacturer shall justify why carpet cannot be recycled.

.5 Landfill or incineration – are not approved disposal methods.

.2 Description of Reclamation Services - Carpet shall be removed from the existing installation

and prepared for pickup based on the type of material and reclamation option selected.

Specifications for removal from the jobsite include:

.1 Removal of carpet tile for recycling

.1 Carpet tile shall be palletized and secured for shipping, (i.e., shrink wrap, banding,

strapping).

.2 Carpet tile shall be kept dry and free of any moisture damage.

.3 Carpet tile shall be clean of any non-carpet debris.

.2 Removal of performance broadloom for recycling.

.1 Performance broadloom shall be rolled, palletized and secured for shipping. Cut

pieces of performance broadloom shall also be acceptable, provided they are

secured for shipping.

.2 Performance broadloom shall be kept dry and free from moisture damage.


- 7 -

.3 Rolls shall be clean of any non-carpet debris, front and back, other than ordinary

soiling in normal use.

.3 Removal of broadloom carpet for recycling.

.1 Rolled carpet shall not exceed six (6) feet in length x one (1) foot diameter.

Width may vary from 2 feet to 12 feet.

.2 Carpet shall be accumulated and kept dry for shipping and processing.

.3 Rolls shall be clean of any non-carpet debris, front and back, other than ordinary

soiling in normal use.

.4 Repurposing of carpet material.

.1 Approval of old carpet for possible donation shall be determined at the jobsite.

.5 All possible recycling options shall be clearly presented and submitted in writing to

owner and specifier prior to job start. A written description of the used carpet

disposal process is required.

.1 Description shall contain information as to complete process of diversion from

landfill.

.2 A certificate shall be furnished upon request verifying the reclamation of the

carpet and the pounds of material diverted from the landfill.

3.2 Installation

.1 General

.1 Modules should be designed such that they create a “floating floor” with no adhesion

to the slab, eliminating any future floor preparation charges on subsequent

installations.

.2 Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. A “no-glue”

waterless method of installation is preferred using materials described in 2.5.3. above.

In the event a releasable glue method of installation is required for any part of the

installation, the following adhesive description applies. Adhesive shall be water-

based and allow for removal of carpet tile at any time without damage to carpet or

substrate. Adhesive shall contain an antimicrobial preservative and have “zero”

calculated VOC’s.

.3 Install carpet under open-bottom obstructions and under removable flanges and

furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space.

.4 Provide cut outs where required. Conceal cut edges with protective edge guards or

overlapping flanges.

.5 Run carpet under open bottom items such as heating convectors, and install tight

against walls, columns and cabinets so the entire floor area is covered with carpet.

Cover over all floor type door closures.


- 8 -

.6 Install edging guard at all openings and doors wherever carpet terminates, unless

indicated otherwise.

.7 Cutting shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation, using

the tools designed for the carpet being installed.

.8 Use leveling compound where necessary. Any floor filling or leveling shall have a

minimum of 4’0” of feather.

.9 Expansion joints - Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting.

.2 Installation

.1 Install carpet according to carpet manufacturer’s printed instructions and in

accordance with the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Installation Standard.

.2 Chair Pads shall not be recommended or required within installation instructions

3.3 Cleaning and Protection

.1 On completion of the installation in each area, all dirt, carpet scraps, etc. shall be removed

from the surface of the carpet.

.2 Remove debris, and sort pieces to be saved from scraps to be repurposed or recycled.

.3 Construction manager shall protect carpeting against damage during construction.

.4 At the completion of the work and when directed by the construction manager, vacuum carpet

using commercial dual motor vacuum of type recommended by carpet manufacturer. Remove

spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Remove rejected carpeting and

replace with new carpeting. Remove any protruding yarns with shears or sharp scissors.

3.4 Inspection

.1 Upon completion of the installation, manufacturer and installer shall verify and certify that

work is complete, properly installed and meets all specification herein.

.2 Preliminary Acceptance - Upon completion of the carpet installation of each floor, such

installation shall be inspected by owner, the construction manager and installation provider.

3.5 Environmental Impact and Measurements. The manufacture of all modular carpet tile shall meet

the following criteria:

.1 Greenhouse gas emissions from purchased electricity and on-site combustion attributable to the

manufacturing process shall average 0.57 kg of carbon dioxide or less per square meter (1.06 lbs

per square yard).

.2 Non renewable energy per unit of production during the manufacturing process shall average

6,200 k or less per square meter (4,900 BTU per square yard).


- 9 -

.3 Solid waste generated at the manufacturing process regardless of disposal method shall average

0.14 kg or less per square meter (0.25 lbs per square yard).

.4 Water intake for manufacturing purposes during the manufacturing process shall average 2.3

liters or less per square meter (0.5 gallons per square yard).


INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on Interior substrates.

1. Steel.

2. Galvanized metal.

3. Gypsum board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according

to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category

specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.




A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to

verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects

and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of

each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its

"MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by NMSU Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

B. Base Coat: United States Gypsum, Product "First Coat", or equal.

3.2 METAL PRIMERS

A. Rust Inhibitive Latex Metal Primer: MPI #107.

B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.



3.3 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.

3.4 SOLVENT-BASED COATINGS

A. Alkyd Varnish, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #74.

3.5 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).

B. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).

C. Interior Latex Fire Retardant: MPI #64

3.6 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.

3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.

4. Wood: 15 percent.

5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

6. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.7 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.



1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

3.8 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.

C. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and

occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping.

b. Uninsulated plastic piping.

c. Pipe hangers and supports.

d. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets.

e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

2. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear.

b. Panelboards.

c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

d. Telephone Backer Panels.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.9 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Drying Latex Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1B. Gloss Level 4

a. Prime Coat: Rust Inhibitive Water Based primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: W.B. Light Industrial Coating.

c. Topcoat: W.B. Light Industrial Coating.



B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J. Gloss Level 4

a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Interior latex.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. Gloss Level 3

a. Base Coat: KWAL 0873, Dunn Edwards Vinylastic (W101), USG First Coat.

b. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.

c. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Interior latex (Satin).

2. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. Gloss Level 4

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

c. Top Coat: Interior latex topcoat. (Semigloss).

Note: Substrates not listed are subject to architectural review to determine the MPI standard during the

submittal process.



INTERIOR SIGNAGE 101419 - 1

SECTION 101419 - INTERIOR SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior Signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."



B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide written documentation of manufacturer’s warranty.

B. Warranty must guarantee interior signs for the life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

A. Manufacturers



1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Century Sign Builders, which is located at 2117 Commercial

NE: Albuquerque, NM 87106, (505) 888-2901 or other providing equal Basis-of-Design

Product as approved by Architect.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Diversity Sign

System or a comparable product as approved by Architect.

1. General Characteristics

a. Regulatory Compliance: All signs shall conform to the requirements of

regulations list in section 1.3 and shall be designed to meet the stated requirements

for color, contrast, letter height, install location and other characteristics required

for accessibility and by local, state and federal regulations.

b. Base material or chassis: NMSU Standard

i. Contractor to coordinate construction of interior signage with NMSU standards.

ii. Overall size and depth/curvature of sign frame as per approved shop drawings.

iii. Finishes for aluminum frame and end caps as per approved shop drawings

c. Lens or cover material: lens and covers shall be constructed using 0.125” (342-

101) or 0.0625” (322-101) clear single-ply non-glare acrylic multi-polymer

(Rowmark).

d. Changeable message inserts will be fabricated from commonly available

transparency media no less than 5 mil thick that is compatible with inkjet or laser

printers such as 3M CG3710 or equivalent.

e. Printed graphic inserts: Printed inserts will be created using a satin-coated, tear-

resistant, rigid PVC media with eco-solvent water fast & UV stable inks.

i. Printed background inserts must be manufactured in color managed workflow

with the following capacities:

ii. All printing must be done using a profiled printer with transmissible ICC profile.

iii. All approved colors used in final design must have LAB values recorded and

submitted to architect owner for future reference and duplication.

iv. Printing must be performed on calibrated printer such that future orders of in-

sert can be reproduced within 5 Delta E of recorded LAB values.

f. Tactile Raised Lettering/Graphic method: Tactile lettering and symbols shall be

formed using rotary engraving method and bonded to sign plaque using 3M Scotch

467HP adhesive. Text, numbers and symbols must have 1/32” return cut to 22-

degree angle. Text, numbers and symbols must be constructed with materials

having embedded coloration that is the final approved color for the signs. Products

with painted or otherwise applied coloration method are not acceptable.

g. Braille Method: Braille must be constructed using the Edgerton Grade 2 Braille

System using clear Raster beads.

h. Vinyl Graphics: As indicated on the shop drawings, signs may have text, graphics

or decorative elements created using applied vinyl graphics film. Such graphics

shall:

i. Be constructed on high performance cast vinyl graphic film products such as 3M

Scotchcal or equal with a 5 year or greater warranty.



ii. Signs shall be cut from sufficiently large rolls of material to minimize seams or

joining of material to create one sign.

iii. All lettering and graphics shall be computer cut from professionally quality

artwork. No hand cut vinyl film shall be installed.

iv. Signs shall be installed free of bubbles, wrinkles or other anomalies.

i. Other features:

i. Signs may be configured in one, two- or three-sided configurations for various

applications as wall mounted, suspended, flag mounted or free standing as per

the approved shop drawings.

j. Installation method:

i. Wall mounted signs: signs shall be mounted using double-sided vinyl foam tape

(1/16” thickness), silicon adhesive or mechanical anchors as per the approved

shop drawings.

ii. Flag mount hardware: provide custom mounting bracket for flag mounted signs

as indicated on shop drawings.

iii. Wall mount hardware: provide custom mounting hardware for wall mounted

signs as indicated on shop drawings.

iv. Suspended mount hardware: provide custom mounting hardware for ceiling

suspended mounted signs as indicated on shop drawings.

v. Free standing hardware: provide base plate and floor fasteners (optional) for free

standing signs as indicated on the shop drawings.

vi. Cubicle mounted hardware: provide removable mounting method for mounting

sign at cubicles, workstations or systems furniture partitions as indicated on the

shop drawings.

vii. Work surface hardware: provide angle bottom flange or stand to allow signs to

be displayed in a vertical (slightly angled) fashion when placed on transaction

counters, desks, etc. as indicated on the shop drawings.

2. Color Selections

a. Tactile lettering/graphics: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

b. Graphic insert: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

c. Changeable insert: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

d. Frame and mounting hardware: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop

drawings

3. Font Selections

a. Tactile lettering: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

b. Graphic insert lettering: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

c. Changeable insert lettering: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings



2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist

water penetration and retention.

2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring

exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed

and contact surfaces.

3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are

inconspicuous.

4. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.

5. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where

possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

6. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and

other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff

castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before

finishing.

B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign

construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as

required.

1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish [to

match sign-background color unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign

surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous

paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,



embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully

sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install

washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until

spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes.

Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with

spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud

ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template.

Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install

through fasteners and tighten.

4. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar

or bracket supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned.

5. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose

debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of

suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive

away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility

of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive.

Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.



WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall guards.

2. Corner guards.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches.


A. Product certificates.

B. Material certificates.

C. Sample warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door-

protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: [Five] years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for

Buildings and Facilities] [and] [ICC A117.1]

2.2 CORNER GUARDS

A. Stainless steel corner guards.

1. Architectural grade (16 ga) stainless #4 brushed satin vertical finish in 90 degree.

2. Pre-drilled holes for Philips head screws

3. 2 inch by 2 inch by 48 inches. 16 gauge

2.3 CORNER GUARDS

A. Bumper Rail: Standard-duty assembly consisting of continuous snap-on plastic cover installed

over concealed retainer; designed to withstand impacts.

1. Manufacturer: Koroseal Wall Protection Systems

2. Profile Basis of Design: BW90

3. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch (2.0-mm) wall thickness; in

dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.

a. Color and Texture: Color to match existing doors [As selected by Architect

from manufacturer's full range]

4. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.080-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded

aluminum.

5. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.

6. Bumper: Continuous, resilient bumper cushion(s).

7. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; [matching color] [cover;

field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

8. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.

9. Mounting: [Surface mounted directly to wall]



2.4 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,

and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where

exposed to view.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written

instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips,

cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights

indicated on Drawings.

C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other

accessories required for a complete installation.

1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads.

2. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum retainers

and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches apart.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire

extinguishers.



B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

C. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable

Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguisher with fire protection cabinet to ensure fit and

function.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting

bracket indicated.

1. Basics-of- Design Product:

a. Amerex Corporation

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd,

c. Badger Fire Protection ; a Kidde company

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation

f. J.L. Industries, Inc.

g. Kidde Residential and commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.

h. Moon-American.

i. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp. a division of PEM Systems, Inc.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2

j. Potter RoemerLLC

k. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Saftey Products

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections,

maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4A-80B;C (10 lbs) nominal capacity, with

monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers

indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,

spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in

red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations

indicated.



21 00 00 - 1 Fire Sprinkler System

SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Design, fabricate, install and secure all necessary approvals of a complete fire protection

automatic sprinkler system in accordance with the standards set forth in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following are described in the indicated other sections for these specifications. Perform all

such work required in strict accordance with the provisions of those sections.

Plumbing Electrical

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. In addition to conforming with all pertinent codes and regulations, conform with the requirements

of the American Insurance Association and NFPA Standard #13 - Standards for the Installation of

Sprinkler Systems (latest edition) and NFPA #13A - Recommended Practice of the Care and

Maintenance of Sprinkler System (latest edition) and the Fire Marshal’s office.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN

A. The entire fire protection automatic sprinkler system shall be designed, fabricated, installed and

tested by a Company regularly engaged in the design, installation and testing of Automatic Fire

Protection Sprinkler Systems for a period of five years.

B. Fire Sprinkler System design shall be performed by an Engineering Technician certified by the

National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) at a minimum of Level

III.

C. All fire sprinkler design shall be performed under the direct supervision of the installing

companies Responsible Managing Employee (RME) registered in the state of Texas. All

design shall be verified and acknowledged by original signature on all shop drawings. Rubber

stamp signature will not be accepted.

D. Unless otherwise noted on specifications, design shall conform to Light Hazard occupancies in

Offices, Classrooms , Gymnasiums, and other areas designated by NFPA 13 as light hazard.

Ordinary Hazard occupancies shall be utilized in janitor closets, storage areas, kitchens, , and

other areas designated by NFPA as Ordinary Hazard. Balance of areas shall be in accordance

with NFPA Classification of Occupancies.

E. Design areas shall be a minimum of 1,500 square feet as described in NFPA. Area

reductions for the use of quick response sprinklers will be considered.



F. A flow test shall be performed within 30 days of shop drawing submittals. Preliminary flow test

information shall be obtained from the Lower Valley Water District for estimating purposes.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings; Submit six (6) sets of the following shop drawings to the Engineer for approval.

When approved, they will be forwarded to the Architect. All shop drawings, before being sent to the Engineer, must bear stamp of approval of the State Agency having jurisdiction over the project.

B. The following items shall be incorporated on all Fire Sprinkler System design shop

drawings as a minimum:

. • Walls, ceilings, lights, and diffusers.

. • Room names and room numbers

. • Ceiling Elevations and obstruction depth and location.

. • Riser Elevations detailing all valves, piping, switches, trims, and drains as required.

. • Riser, water motor gong and Fire Department Connection Location.

. • System limits and size.

. • Site plan showing all fire hydrants, underground piping, flow test, and fire hydrant

. hose lay.

. • All main, branchlines showing sizes, elevation and transitions.

. • Piping center to center dimensions as a minimum. Cut lengths are allowed.

. • Dimensions showing distances off of walls, head to head, etc.

. • All types of sprinklers utilized with all information on sprinklers and quantity.

. • Hanger and support locations spaced in accordance with NFPA 13.

. • Hanger details, drain details, etc stating all equipment being used.

. • Hydraulic information including all node points, remote areas, design information,

. base of the riser and point of connection demands.

. • Structural layout and description of structural materials.

. • All necessary cross sections detailing conflicting areas and pipe routing.

. • Major duct locations and roof penetration drops.

C. All drawing and calculations shall be submitted to the Fire Marshal office for permit. Any

additional information required by the Fire Marshal will be provided by the contractor at no

additional cost to the Owner.

D. As-built drawings: During progress of the work of this section, maintain an accurate record

all changes made in the design of the fire sprinkler system.

E. Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, accurately transfer all

as-built information to three (3) identical blue-line prints of the approved shop drawings. Insert

one print into each copy of the manual described below.

F. Manual: Upon completion of the installation, and a condition of its acceptance, compile the

following manual and deliver three (3) copies to the Owner.

G. Size: Approximately 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches.

H. Format: Firmly bound in hard backed binder with clear plastic pocket on spline. "Looseleaf" binding is not acceptable.



I. Contents:

Identification inserted in the spline of each binder shall be as follows: "FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM MANUAL”.

Neatly typed index, at or near the front, with all emergency information location clearly identified.

A complete list of all components of the system with manufacturer’s name, catalog numbers and all data required of ordering replacement parts.

One copy of the as-built drawings described above.

All information required to affect or secure emergency repairs or service.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Use all means necessary to protect fire sprinkler system materials before, during and after

installation and to protect the installed work of other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacement necessary to the approval of, and at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. All installations of new underground supply lines to the new buildings shall be installed in

accordance to NFPA 13, NFPA 24, HRMUD , and TCEQ.

B. Underground piping from the city supply to the building shall be C-900 class 150 PVC pipe.

Underground pipe from the building line to the fire sprinkler riser shall be Ductile Iron class

50. Connections shall be bell end or mechanical joint.

C. All underground fittings shall be cast iron mechanical joint for connections between ductile iron

and C-900 CPVC.

D. All underground piping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.

Bedding shall be installed as required by ground conditions. A minimum of 3’ bury depth shall be

maintained. Caution shall be installed 12” below finish grade.

E. Underground pipe sizing shall be in accordance to system hydraulic calculations or a minimum of

6” in diameter. If hydrants are installed on a dead end line to the building, 8” supply will be

installed if more than one fire hydrant is installed. If an underground fire line loop is installed

around the building, sizing shall be in accordance to hydraulic calculations and sectionalized by

post indicator valves to avoid complete building isolation.

F. All change of directions in piping shall be restrained per NFPA utilizing concrete thrust

restraints. Sizing of thrust blocks shall be verified and approved by an OWNER

representative prior to being buried.



G. Private fire hydrants shall be installed in accordance with the County Fire Marshal

requirements of 600’ hose lay around a fully sprinklered building. Preliminary site utility plans

must show these requirements prior to sprinkler design.

H. All hydrants installed shall have a NRS gate valve in a roadway box within 3’ of the

hydrant for maintenance purposes. All new hydrants shall be city approved hydrants.

I. All new fire lines require a new Reduce Pressure Backflow Assembly complete with large volume

meter installed at the property line of the school. RPBA shall be installed near the domestic and

landscaping backflows so all valves are located in one spot. Installation of backflows inside the

facility is not acceptable.

J. RPDA’s will be installed in accordance to the Lower Valley Water District and TNRCC cross

connection program. Correct elevation shall be maintained below the relief valve.

K. All RPDA’s shall have O.S.& Y gate valves installed per NFPA 13 for the requirement of

indicating valves. Valves shall be chained and locked in the open position.

L. An insulated enclosure to protect all the backflows from freezing shall be provided by the

contractor. This enclosure will enclose all valves under one enclosure. Enclosure shall be ASSE

certified.

M. Hydrostatic test of the underground will perform for 2 hours with no leaks observed. All hubs

will be exposed at that time for visual inspection. This inspection and test will be witnessed by

an OWNER representative. 24-hour notice is required.

N. The contractor will be responsible for applying for the fire line tap. Contractor to provide the

OWNER representative with a copy of the application. Fees will be paid for by OWNER.

O. Prior to system acceptance of the underground, all lines will be flushed in accordance to NFPA at

a minimum of 20 feet per second to flush out all debris and impairments. Flushing will continue

until the water is clear and free of debris. The installed backflow will be flushed and tested by an

authorized backflow prevention technician licensed by the State of Texas. All testing documents

will be provided in the Operation and Maintenance manuals at the end of the project. All tests

documents to be signed and witnessed by an OWNER representative.

P. All piping that can be welded or grooved shall be Schedule 10, schedule 40, copper type L hard

piping in accordance with Table 6.3.1.1 of NFPA 13 2002 Edition.

Q. All piping that is to be threaded shall be schedule 40 piping in accordance with Table

6.3.1.1 of NFPA 13 2002 Edition. Threadable thinwall will not be accepted.

R. All fittings, grooved, flanged, or threaded shall be in accordance with Table 6.4.1 of NFPA 13

2002 Edition.



S. All welding shall be performed in a shop in accordance to NFPA 13. Field welding is not

acceptable.

T. All pipe fabrication shall be in accordance with NFPA. Welded outlets shall be free of any

imperfections. Oval holes and partial cut holes obstructing flow will not be accepted. All mains

and branchlines that are welded will be available for OWNER inspection.

U. All hangers to be installed in accordance to NFPA 13. Rod will be straight and plumb. All

hangers to be listed for the use in fire sprinkler systems. Bent rod will be removed and replaced.

Headers to be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA.

V. System size will not exceed 52,000 square feet per floor. Multiple risers on a manifold will be

installed at the supply entrance to the building. Unless otherwise noted, all areas of the school

shall be protected by the fire sprinkler systems.

W. Fire Department Connections shall be installed on the address side of the facility. Threads shall

meet the requirements of the County Fire Department. Elevation shall be between 18” and 2’-6”

of the finish grade.

X. The following shall be included on all risers:

. • O.S.&Y gate valve with tamper switch

. • Alarm valve with trim (riser checks are not acceptable)

. • Water motor Gong

. • Flow Switch

. • Main drains and piping

. • Spare head box and required wrench of socket and adequate number of sprinklers per NFPA 13

. • Identification signs for all valves.

. • Hydraulic placard for all areas designed

. • Emergency operation and shut down procedures posted and protected under

. glass.

.

Y. Install a 4-way sway brace at the top of each riser to prevent movement.

Z. All sprinklers installed in lay-in ceilings or gypboard ceilings to be recessed chrome type

pendents.

AA. All sprinklers in exposed areas to be brass upright type sprinklers.

AB. All sprinklers installed near kilns, kitchen hoods, or other equipment that produces heat,

sprinklers shall be rated at 286 degrees.

AC. Sprinklers installed in refrigerators and freezers shall be dry pendent type sprinklers with

chrome 2-piece escutcheons and head guards. Shaft shall be at least 16” long. Install upright

sprinklers above freezers and coolers that have equipment above the ceiling.



AD. Extended coverage sprinklers shall be permitted. Installation must be in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations and NFPA 13.

AE. Inspectors test connections shall be installed at the furthest distance from the riser. Install a

splash block at the exterior drain point to avoid eroding.

AF. Install auxiliary drains where necessary. Route piping to nearest janitor’s closet and sink. If

routed to the exterior, install a splash block on the drain point to avoid eroding.

AG. All sprinkler installations in ceilings to be plumb and level. Sprinklers do not need to be

installed in the center of the tile, however, do not place any sprinkler closer than 6” from any

grid component.

AH. Install upright sprinklers at the top of the elevator hoistway. Provide an O.S.&Y gate valve and

flow switch at the exterior of the shaft to monitor the sprinkler. Sprinkler head shall be 200

degrees.

AI. Install an upright or pendent sprinkler in the elevator machine room. Provide and O.S.&Y gate

valve and flow switch outside the room to monitor the sprinkler.

AJ. Sprinklers are not required in the elevator pit. Pit to be enclosed, non combustible and

equipment to be non combustible.

AK. All fire sprinkler systems are required to be monitored. Fire Alarm contractor to provide space

in the building for a fire alarm panel to all fire sprinkler flow switches and tamper switches. Fire

Sprinkler contractor will provide the devices and the fire alarm contractor to route wire and tie

into panel.

AL. All systems are to be hydrostatically tested for 2 hours without any leaks. Test will be

witnessed by an OWNER representative. 24-hour notice will be required.

AM. Prior to system acceptance, all systems shall be flushed at a minimum of 20 feet per

second to remove all debris and impairments per NFPA 13, 8.14.16. Flushing to be

witnessed by an OWNER representative.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PRIOR TO INSTALLATION

A. Prior to the commencement of each stage of the fire sprinkler system installation, carefully

inspect the installed work of other trades and determine that all such work is sufficiently complete to allow this installation to begin and that the work or other trades has been installed in such a manner as to permit this installation to be made in complete accordance with the approved design.

3.2 COORDINATION



A. Coordinate the installation schedule for this portion of the work with the overall construction schedule for the work to ensure orderly progress of the work with an absolute minimum of delay.

B. Coordinate interface of fire sprinkler system with the work of all other trades to ensure proper and

adequate provision of the installation and connection of this system.

3.3 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. Perform all required excavating, trenching and backfilling for this portion of the work in strict

accordance with the provision of these sections of these specifications.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install the complete fire sprinkler system in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings.

Perform all piping installation in strict accordance with the provision of the Plumbing Section of these specifications, including the furnishing of all required sleeves for fire sprinkler system pipes passing through walls, floors, and other parts of the building and the furnishing and installing of all split wallplates and escutcheons for exploded fire sprinkler system pipes.

B. Do not cut or make holes in any part of the building except where shown on the approved shop

drawings.

C. This Contractor shall be responsible for interconnection of fire sprinkler system with the fire

detection and alarm system.

D. Furnish and install next to the sprinkler riser main a printed sheet protected by glass or a

transparent plastic cover, giving brief instructions regarding control, emergency procedure and

other data as required by NFPA #13. For hydraulically designed sprinkler systems, a placard

must be permanently attached to the rise indicating the location, and the basis of design,

(discharge density and system demand).

3.5 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. All tests below shall be witnessed by a representative from the Engineer’s office. The Contractor

shall inform the Engineer of the time and place to witness the tests a minimum of 24 hours in advance. Failure to notify the Engineer shall be cause for rejection and retest of the system.

B. Prior to connecting to the overhead sprinkler piping, flush the underground main thoroughly. Secure all required approvals of the flushing operation.

C. Upon completion of the fire sprinkler system installation, test and retest the complete installation and make all corrections as necessary to secure acceptance by any other authority having jurisdiction. Furnish all test equipment and personnel required.

3.6 INSTRUCTIONS

A. Prior to the building opening date, instruct selected personnel in the operation of the sprinkler

system. Take special care to ensure that these personnel will immediately recognize whether the main valve is in open or closed positions.

B. Know how to drain the system.



C. Know how to test alarm valve.

D. Be familiar with the existence and contents of the manual described above.

3.7 SCHEDULE FOR COMPLETION

A. Complete the Automatic Fire Sprinkler System ready for operation, in all respects, within the

allotted time. When the system is complete and ready for continuous operation, activate the system for its intended use. After the system has been activated for continuous use, water changes, if any, will be paid by Owner.

B. Fire Protection systems including fire hydrants, backflow preventors, etc shall be tested and

inspected prior to the occupancy of the facility (substantial completion).

C. Upon OWNER acceptance of the facility, the contractor shall perform both quarterly and

annual inspections for the first year warranty period. The owner shall take over all

inspection and maintenance after the first year is complete (from final acceptance).

D. All documentation will be provided to OWNER of all inspections performed and a written

report of deficiencies found and corrected prior to relieving the contractor of obligations.

END OF SECTION 21 00 00


HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 1

SECTION 230000 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONTENTS

A. This section of the specifications contains items applicable only to the Heating, Ventilating and

Air conditioning system. This section of the specifications supplements and modifies some of the statements herein as to apply specifically to the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system.

1.2 SCOPE

A. It is the intent of these specifications and drawings to furnish a heating, ventilating and air

conditioning system inside and outside of the building, complete, fully adjusted and ready to use. All work and material must conform to all State and Local Codes in every respect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION

A. Insulation shall be as specified in Section 220700, Insulation for Mechanical Systems.

2.2 VALVES

A. Valves shall be as specified in Section 220500 Mechanical General Conditions.

2.3 SHEET METAL

A. All ductwork shall be fabricated and installed so that no undue vibration or noise results. All

joints shall be airtight with additional caulking provided if necessary. Ducts shall be constructed of the best grade galvanized mild steel sheets with joints and reinforcing in accordance with the recommended construction as listed in the current edition of HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standards - SMACNA. Ductwork installed between outlet of air handling units and terminal units shall be constructed to 4 “ water gage pressure class and sealed to class A sealing requirements. Ductwork downstream of terminal units, fan coil units, evaporative coolers, and downstream of exhaust fans shall be constructed to 1” water gage pressure class and sealed to class B sealing requirements. Hang ducts with straps attached to bottom of ducts spaced in accordance with SMACNA Standards. Curved elbows, if used, shall have a center line radius equal to 1-1/2 times the duct width. Square elbows shall have turning vanes equal to HEP Aerodyne Co. ducturns. Job fabricated vanes will not be accepted without prior approval.

B. Provide all necessary dampers as required for proper adjustment and control of air distribution.

Provide volume extractors similar to Metalaire Airtrol extractors set at 20 degrees at all branches in ductwork where other means of control are not indicated or used, and in ductwork behind sidewall supply registers. All damper rods shall be marked to indicate the relative position of the damper lade with respect to rod.

C. Provide one inch (1") angle collars for all exposed ducts passing through walls, ceiling or floors.

Anchor collars in position after installation is complete.



D. Provide flexible connection at inlet and discharge connections of fans and air handling equipment to prevent mechanical noises from being transmitted to connecting ductwork. Use flexible connection similar and equal to "Ventfab".

E. Install hinged doors on ductwork and housing to provide access to all parts of every automatic

damper, fire damper and all other items requiring maintenance or inspection. Access doors shall be 18" X 12" if permitted by duct size, and if not, shall be as large as possible. All access panels shall have sponge rubber gaskets cemented in place with cam lock closures.

F. Shop Drawings shall be submitted on all items of sheet metal work specified herein. Shop Drawings

of ductwork at air units shall be submitted at a minimum scale of 3/8" equal to one foot.

G. Shop Drawings shall be submitted on all other ductwork. Shop Drawings shall indicate location of all

supply, return, exhaust and light fixtures from the approved reflected ceiling plans.

H. Provide sample drives, duct and guage thickness, and reinforcing requirements for Engineers approval.

2.4 FIBERGLASS DUCTBOARD

A. Fiberglass ductboard shall not be used on this project.

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. Flexible duct connectors shall be constructed of galvanized spring-steel-wire helix with a two-ply

airtight inner core; nominal one inch (1") thick fiberglass insulation and vinyl vapor barrier, suitable to two inch (2") water gauge. Medium pressure duct connection to VAV box terminals shall be rated to a minimum 4” water gage. Entire duct assembly shall be listed to UL label and shall be Thermoid, Portoduct Type 1 or equal. Maximum length of each run shall be eight (5') feet and supported without sagging. Flex duct shall be allowed only where indicated on the drawings.

2.6 VIBRATION

A. Ductwork shall be isolated from rotating or reciprocating equipment to which it is attached by

means of a flexible connection. See sheet metal specification elsewhere herein for exact requirements. Equipment base isolators shall be provided where detailed on the drawings for equipment on floors, pads or bases.

2.7 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS

A. Furnish and install grilles, registers, diffusers and accessories of size and type as indicated on

drawings. All to be as manufactured by Nailor, Metal-Aire, Carnes, Titus, or approved equal. See the schedule on the drawings for type and model.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP



A. All work shall be first-class in every respect and shall be done by mechanics skilled in the trade involved. Careless and/or sloppy work shall be resolved and replaced properly at the Contractor's expense.

3.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall be required to confer with the Architect, General Contractor and Owner to

determine a schedule of times at which the various items of work are to be accomplished.

3.3 CONSULTATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

A. Before commencing the work, the Contractor shall consult with the General Contractor and other

Subcontractors and arrive at a thorough understanding as to the location of all equipment, ducts, etc., so that there will be no interference with other work. The time of installation of sleeves, etc. shall be determined by the Contractor. In the event he should fail to have material on the job and such provisions are not made previously with the Gen. Contractor, necessary arrangements shall be made at the expense of the Contractor.

3.4 CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING

A. The Contractor is cautioned to instruct his mechanics to keep all equipment, ducts an materials

free of foreign materials during installation. Any malfunction of the several system resulting from sand, rocks and other foreign material in the systems shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall thoroughly cleanout the several duct system. The Contractor shall take precaution during the cleaning operation to protect his work and the work of all other traces and should any damage be done, he shall remedy or repair it to the complete satisfaction of all concerned, and at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Functional Tests: Make specific tests of all equipment and materials and portions of this

installation as required herein to prove their condition and performance and any tests as required by any authority having jurisdiction over this type of installation. The Contractor shall adjust all equipment, air quantities, controls and devices, so that all components of the various systems are left in proper working order. As part of this test the entire piping system shall be pressurized to 100 PSI for four (4) hours. These tests must be witnessed by a representative from the Engineer's office. All hydronic piping to be flushed out and chemical added.

3.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

1. Three binders shall be submitted to mechanical consultant. Consultant shall review and

approve then submit the 3 copies to the owner.

2. Operating and maintenance manuals shall include the following systems:

a. Mechanical systems

b. Plumbing systems

c. Fire protection systems

d. Energy/management control systems (EMCS)

3. All components specified and/or scheduled of the above systems shall require O&M

manuals and shall be identified according to the specifications and/or schedule

identification mark/label.

4. Basic information required for O&M manuals:

a. Operating routines and procedures:

Control sequences



Temperature set points

Control diagrams

Ventilation requirements

5. Start-up and shut-down procedures i.e. checklist for start-up/shut-down

a. Equipment/fixture specific information

Identification mark/label

Manufacturer name

Model #

Etc.

b. Trouble shooting section

c. Preventive maintenance program including frequency of actions

d. Scheduled maintenance programs including frequency of actions

e. Parts lists with local vendors (multiple if available)

6. Manuals shall be submitted and approved by mechanical consultant prior to substantial

completion acceptance.

3.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

Submit shop drawings on the following:

1. All sheet metal ductwork 2. Flex Duct, 3. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers, 4. Kitchen Hoods, 5. Exhaust fans,



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 230500 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. The scope of the work included under this Division of the specifications shall include a complete

mechanical system as shown on the plans and as specified herein. The Architectural General Conditions of these specifications shall form a part and be included under this section of the specifications. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all supervision, labor, material, equipment, machinery, plant and any and all other items necessary to complete the mechanical system. All other items of equipment are specified in the singular; however, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide and install the number of items of equipment as indicated on the drawings, and as required for complete systems.

B. It shall be noted that work under this section of the specifications includes: Heating, Ventilating

and Air Conditioning, 23 00 00; Mechanical General Conditions, 23 05 00, Insulation for Mechanical Systems, 23 07 00; Test and Balance, 23 05 93;

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 CODES, RULES, PERMITS, FEES

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all

government and state sales taxes, fees, and other costs, including utility connections or extensions, in connection with his work; file all necessary plans, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver same to the Architect before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. The Mechanical Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings, in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations whether or not shown on drawings and/or specified. Refer to General Conditions for additional information.

B. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the National Fire Codes of the

National Fire Protection Association, with the requirements of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. All materials and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical system shall bear the approval label, shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and bear the UL label. All mechanical equipment, electrical wiring, and devices shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC).

2.2 INTENT

A. It is the intention of these specifications and drawings to call for finished work, tested, and ready

for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall mean "furnish and install complete and ready for use". Details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper installation and operation, shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or shown.

2.3 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS



A. The Mechanical Contractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical from established benchmarks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check corrections of same as related to the work. Should the Mechanical Contractor discover any discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, which prevents following good practice or the intent of the drawings and specifications, he shall notify the Architect, through the General Contractor, and shall not proceed with his work until he has received instructions from the Architect. The Contractor must carefully locate and verify all of the existing utilities to be used as a part of this contract.

2.4 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included

in the contract. Drawings are not to be scaled. The architectural drawings and details shall be examined for exact locations of fixtures and equipment. Where they are not definitely located, this information shall be obtained from the Engineer, before he proceeds with the work. The Mechanical Contractor shall follow drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate the Architect shall be notified before proceeding with installation.

2.5 "OR EQUAL"

A. Wherever the words "approved equal", "equal", or words to the same effect are used in

connection with any specified material, it is to be understood that such words mean any material or work of any kind claimed to be an equal in quality to the work or material specified and shall be so approved in writing by the Engineer, except as noted. It is further understood that no material or work shall be presented to the Engineer as work or material equal to that specified without the full understanding on the part of the manufacturers and agents for the so-called "equal" material, and the full understanding on the part of the contractors, that the Engineer is to use his own judgment in the matter; that his decision is final, and that in the event of an adverse condition, no claim of any sort shall be made against the Owner or Architect or Engineer.

2.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall submit for approval detailed shop drawings of all equipment and

all material required to complete the project, and no material or equipment may be delivered to the jobsite or installed until the Mechanical Contractor has in his possession the approved shop drawings for the particular material or equipment. The shop drawings shall be complete as described herein. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the number of copies required by the General and Special Conditions of the contract, but in no case less than four (4) copies. Prior to delivery of any material to the jobsite, and sufficiently in advance of requirements to allow the Architect ample time for checking, submit for approval: detailed, dimensions, operating clearances, performance characteristics and capacity. Each item of equipment proposed shall be a standard catalog product of an established manufacturer and of equal quality, finish and durability to that specified.

B. The Mechanical Contractor shall submit for approval detailed ductwork and mechanical room

layout shop drawings; showing coordination between disciplines, see above for submission

requiredments.



2.7 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS

A. Where the Mechanical Contractor proposed to use an item of equipment other than that specified

or detailed on the drawings, which required any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be prepared by the Mechanical Contractor at his own expense and approved by the Architect. Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit and equipment from that specified or indicated on the drawings, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.8 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall furnish in writing

to the Contractor, with copies to the Architect, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.

2.9 PROTECTION

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his workmen, and

shall be liable for all damage thus caused and replace all damaged materials at no cost to the Owner. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted. He shall protect work against theft, injury or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on-site which is not immediately installed. He shall close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.

2.10 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary

for erection and deliver onto the premises any equipment and apparatus furnished. The Contractor will remove the necessary equipment from the premises when no longer required.

2.11 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Mass excavation to approximate building levels will be carried out under a section of the

architectural specifications. The Mechanical Contractor shall; however, do all trench and pit excavation and backfilling required for work under this section of the specifications, inside and outside the building, including repairing of finished surfaces, all required shoring, bracing, pumping and all protection for safety of persons and property. Local or State Safety Codes shall be strictly observed. In addition, it shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to check the indicated elevation of the utilities entering and leaving the building. If such elevations require excavations lower than the footing levels, the Architect shall be notified of such conditions and a redesign shall be made before excavations are commenced. It is also the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to make the excavations at the minimum required



depths in order not to undercut the footing. Filling, backfilling and compaction shall be as specified under the architectural sections of these specifications.

B. Backfill may be native material except that all material from six inches (6") below the pipe

bottom to six inches above the top of the pipe must pass a 3/4" sieve. If the native material is determined to be too rocky by the Engineer, he may require imported material for pipe bedding.

2.12 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials and apparatus required for the work, except as specifically specified otherwise, shall

be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and furnished

in every detail, and

shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific

kind or quality of material is given a first-class standard article as approved by the Architect shall

be furnished. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced

superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work, together with all

skilled workmen, fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers, and labor required to unload, transfer,

erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test each system.

B. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the plans or specifications all equipment and materials shall be installed with the approval of the Engineer in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the Manufacturer instructs.

2.13 MOTORS

A. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest standards of NEMA and as specified. Motors

shall be tested in accordance with standard of A.S.A., C50 and conform thereto for insulation resistance and dielectric strength. Provide motors manufactured by General Electric, Westinghouse, Allis Chalmers or Century designed for quiet continuous operation with forty (40) degrees C. rise at full load and rated speed as individually specified. Motors shall be of the same make except those incorporated in package units, and all, including those in package units, shall be provided with ball bearings and conduit connection boxes. Unless stated otherwise, motors 1 HP and smaller shall be suitable for operation of single phase, 60 cycle, and 120 volt current. All motors shall be provided with thermal overload protection. Motors 1 HP or larger shall be either 208 volt or 480 volt, three phase as scheduled. Two speed, three phase motors shall be dual winding.

B. All motor starters shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor if integral with the equipment.

All three phase magnetic starters shall be furnished with three coil overload protection. All starters which are not integral with the equipment and other electrical control equipment installed in damp, moist or areas of special conditions, shall be designed and approved for the installation.

2.14 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION

A. All work shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound of vibration which is

objectionable in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer. In case of moving machinery, sound or vibration noticeable outside its own room will be considered objectionable. Sound or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Architect shall be corrected in an approved manner by the Mechanical Contractor at his expense. Vibration control shall be by means of approved vibration eliminators in a manner as recommended by the manufacturer of the eliminators.

2.15 ACCESSIBILITY



A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and

chases, the adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for the proper installation of his work. The Contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other contractors whose work is in the same space, and shall advise the General Contractor of his requirements. Such spaces and clearances shall; however, be kept to the minimum size required. The mechanical Contractor shall locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include but not be limited to: valves, traps, cleanouts, motors and controllers. If required or better accessibility, any change shall be approved by the Architect. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide the General Contractor the exact locations of access panels for each concealed valve, control, damper or other device requiring service. Access panels not shown in the architectural drawings shall be provided and installed by the Mechanical Contractor and as specified in architectural sections of the specifications. Locations of these panels shall be submitted in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work

2.16 FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS, PIERS, ATTACHMENTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary foundations, supports, pads and bases

required for all equipment furnished under this contract, unless otherwise noted. All equipment where foundations are indicated, furnish and install concrete pads as shown. All pads shall be extended six inches (6") beyond equipment base in all directions with top edge chamfered. All equipment, unless otherwise shown, shall be securely attached to the building structure in an approved manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature and any attachments that are, in the opinion of the Architect, not strong enough shall be replaced as directed.

2.17 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all power wiring except the following when

rated at 25 VAC or less: (1) temperature control wiring; (2) equipment control wiring; and (3) interlocking wiring. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all starters not factory mounted on equipment or otherwise noted. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install all temperature control wiring, interlock wiring and equipment control wiring of 25 VAC or less for the equipment that he furnishes. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish a starter to the Electrical Contractor, where scheduled on the drawings or integral with the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide and be responsible for the heater in all starters that the Mechanical Contractor furnishes.

2.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for all framing, cutting and patching necessary to

install the work specified in this section. Patching shall match adjacent surfaces and be performed by qualified workmen approved by the Architect. All work shall be in accordance with the applicable Architectural section of these specifications.

2.19 SLEEVES AND PLATES



A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide and locate all sleeves and inserts required before the

floors and walls are built, or shall be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located, or where they are to be installed in existing walls. Sleeves shall be provided for all mechanical piping passing through concrete floor slabs, masonry, concrete, tile and gypsum wall construction. Where sleeves are placed in exterior walls below grade, the space between the pipe or conduit and the sleeves shall be sealed with link-seal rubber expansion sealers or equal and be made completely watertight. Sleeves shall be constructed of twenty-four (24) gauge galvanized sheet metal with lock seam joints for all sleeves set in concrete floor slabs terminating flush with the floor. All other sleeves shall be constructed of steel pipe unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

2.20 ESCUTCHEON PLATES

A. Escutcheon plates shall be provided for all exposed uninsulated pipes and all exposed conduit passing through walls, floors and ceilings. Plates shall be nickel-plated, of the split ring type, sized to match the pipe or conduit. Where plates are provided for pipes passing through sleeves which extend above the floor surface, provide deep recessed plates to conceal the pipe sleeves.

2.21 WATERPROOFING

A. Where any work pierces waterproofing including waterproof concrete, the method of installation

shall be as approved by the Architect before work is done. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish all necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required to make openings absolutely watertight.

2.22 GUARDS

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide belt drivers and rotating machinery with readily

removable guards. Guards not furnished with equipment requiring it shall consist of heavy angle iron frames, hinged and latched, with heavy galvanized iron wire crimped mesh securely fastened to frames.

2.23 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of all work and all tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor

and helpers for operating this system and equipment for a minimum period of three (3) days of eight (8) hours each. During this period, instruct the Owner or his representative fully in the operations, adjustment, and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to the Architect four (4) complete bound sets for delivery to the Owner of typewritten or blueprinted instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment included in this contract. All instructions shall be submitted in draft, for approval, prior to final issue. Mount at a location determined by the Owner, a step-by-step procedure to operate the system in a frame covered with a glass front. The Mechanical Contractor shall include the maintenance schedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this contract.

2.24 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. All piping at one or more points shall be installed so that they can be easily drained. Provide

means of drainage of low points of all piping without disconnecting pipe. If other than valves are



contemplated, the Architect's permission shall be obtained. All installed pipelines shall be straight and remain straight against strains tending to cause distortion, noise, damage, or improper operation. Piping shall be installed square with the building construction and risers shall be plumb. All piping must be kept clean and free from scale or loose dirt when installed, and must be keep clean during the completion of the installation. All openings in the piping system shall be capped or plugged while awaiting further connection whenever there is a reasonable hazard of dirt entering the piping system. Soil, waste and drainage lines shall be properly graded. Cold water, domestic hot water and gas lines shall be slightly pitched toward drain points.

2.25 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Horizontal piping shall be suspended from the overhead structure with Grinnell Co. pipe hangers

and anchors and threaded rods. Perforated metal straps will not be allowed on the job. Hangers shall be installed to allow for continuity of insulation. Maximum hanger spacing shall be six feet (6').

2.26 VALVES

A. Unless otherwise specified, all valves shall be Stockham, Nibco-Scott, Crane or Hammond. B. Domestic water use suitable for l25 PSI working pressure. Ball or butterfly valves shall be used

on domestic water piping.

C. Ball valves or cast iron greaseable plug valves shall be used in gas lines.

D. Ball valves or butterfly valves shall be used on heating and cooling system water. Ball valves shall be soldered or threaded through two inch (2"), two piece body construction rated for 400 PSIG WOG, chromium plated or stainless steel standard ball port. Butterfly valves shall be cast iron body construction rated for 200 PSIG with an encapsulated stem and disc.

E. Valve locations are either shown or covered by note on the plans. However, the Contractor shall

be held responsible for furnishing and installing all valves inadvertently omitted from the drawings in locations where valves are customarily furnished for operation and maintenance without undue

disruption of service.

F. The Mechanical Contractor shall prepare and install in a suitable glazed frame, typewritten valve charts giving the number, location and function of each line and valve installed under this contract. Provide and install for each valve a stamped brass tag, numbered to correspond to the number indicated on the valve chart. Tags shall be secured to valve stems by heavy, figure-eight hooks.

2.27 UNIONS

A. Unions shall be provided at all equipment and wherever else necessary to allow for ease in

making repairs or replacements. Furnish and install approved insulating couplings at all

connections between dissimilar metals, steel to copper. 2.28 INSTALLATION OF THREADED PIPE



A. Screw joints shall be made with lubricant applied to the male threads only; threads shall be full cut and not more than three (3) threads on the pipe shall remain exposed. All new cut ends must be deburred and reamed.

2.29 JOINTS IN COPPER WATER PIPING

A. The pipe shall be cut square and true. The end shall be deburred, reamed, and/or sized as

necessary. The pipe shall be cleaned with medium grit emery cloth and if the fitting socket is tarnished or shows oxidation, it shall be likewise cleaned. The pipe and fitting shall be fluxed with Nokorode Paste. Joints shall be made up with the type of solder as hereinafter specified. Reducing tees formed by extruding the larger pipe will not be acceptable for pipe two (2") inches or smaller. On pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger extruding the reducing tee will be acceptable provided flux is applied to both tee and pipe and the joint silver soldered with a torch using a mixture of oxygen and acetylene.

2.30 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING

A. All service piping which is accessible for maintenance operations will be identified with

SETMARK semi-rigid plastic markers or equal. Direction of flow arrows are to be included on each marker, unless otherwise specified. For pipes under 3/4" OD, brass identification tags 1-1/2" in diameter will be fastened securely at specified locations.

B. Locations for pipe markers to be as follows:

At each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction. At each pipe passage to underground. On all horizontal pipe runs - marked every 15 feet. At each branch and riser take-off. Adjacent to each valve and fitting (except on plumbing fixtures and equipment) C. Provide ceiling tack markers at all location of equipment located within ceiling space. Including

terminal units, fan coil units, etc…

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM TEST AND CLEANING

A. Scope: Before the final air balance test, the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system

shown on the drawings shall be tested to assure performance of all units. District personnel to be present during startup

procedures.

B. Heating System: The entire heating system shall be tested at the completion of the building and it

shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating satisfactorily. The system shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.

C. Air Conditioning System: The entire air conditioning system shall be tested at the first summer weather next following the completion of the building; and it shall be established that all controls



are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are cooling satisfactorily. The system shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.

D. Ventilating System: The entire ventilation system shall be tested at the completion of the project;

and it shall be established that controls are performing satisfactorily and that all rooms are ventilating properly. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.

E. Final Check-up: At the completion of all work all equipment on the project shall be checked and

thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, pipes, plumbing fixtures, etc., and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters after final clean up. All start-up strainers shall be removed and replaced with operating strainers. Strainer mesh shall be approved by the Engineer.

F. Painting: At the completion of all work all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting

damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal or specially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.2 LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall properly lubricate all pieces of equipment before turning the

building over to the Owner. He shall attach a tag to each motor showing the date of lubrication and lubricant needed.

3.3 GUARANTEE

A. The entire mechanical system shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after final acceptance of

the project against any defects in equipment, material or workmanship. Any necessary labor, equipment or material required to correct such defects shall be furnished and paid for by the Mechanical Contractor without further cost to the Owner. Provide the Owner a written guarantee on the above item. Deliver to the Architect for his approval.



TEST AND BALANCE 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 TEST AND BALANCE

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This section covers the testing and balancing of environmental system including but not limited

to: air distribution systems, hydronic distribution system and the equipment and apparatus

connected thereto.

B. The work required herein shall consist of setting volume (flow) and speed adjusting facilities

provided or specified for the systems, recording data, making tests and preparing reports, all as

hereinafter specified.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The work described in this section shall be performed by a firm(s) certified by the National

Environmental Balancing Bureau. If the Installing Contractor is not certified by the NEBB, he

shall submit appropriate data indicating experience and qualifications.

PART 2 - PROCEDURE

2.1 PROCEDURES

A. The environmental systems including all equipment, apparatus and distribution system shall be

tested and balanced in accordance with the NEBB “Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting

and Balancing of Environmental Systems” published by the NEBB, Current Edition.

B. All work performed under this section shall be under the direction of the supervisor who is

designated and qualified under the certification requirements of NEBB.

C. All instruments used for measurement shall be accurate, and calibration histories for each

instrument shall be available for examination. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments

shall be in accordance with the requirements of NEBB.

D. Accuracy of measurement shall be in accordance with NEBB standards.

E. General Information

1. The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Contractor shall be independent from the

controls contractor and equipment sales representative for the specific construction

project.

2. The contractor shall test adjust and balance the following mechanical systems.

a. Supply air systems

b. Return air systems

c. Exhaust air systems

d. Verify control systems

RIO GRANDE PREPARATORY CULINARY ARTS

TEST AND BALANCE 230593-2

3. A certified NEBB supervisor must be onsite at all times during TAB work to completely

oversee the testing, adjusting, and balancing of the system.

4. A pre-balance conference shall take place between the mechanical engineer, mechanical

contractor, controls contractor, electrical contractor and possibly the owners

representative prior to beginning of the testing, balancing and adjusting. Discussion

shall focus on the verification that the system is ready or TAB work.

5. TAB work shall be completed with final report prior to the completion of the pre-punch

checklist for equipment.

6. Field reports shall be issued to mechanical contractor and mechanical consultant directly

form TAB contractor regarding deficiencies in the system that prevent proper TAB work

as well as proper system operation.

7. Preliminary and final reports shall be outlined by mechanical consultant regarding

submission of data and formatting requirements.

8. Calibration of instruments and balancing tolerances to be outlined by mechanical

consultant.

9. Preliminary data shall include the following information with deficiencies reported on

field reports.

F. AIR SYSTEM BALANCING

1. Review design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the

design intent.

2. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine

variations of installation from design.

3. Check filters for cleanliness.

4. Check dampers for correct and locked position, and temperature control for completeness

of installation before starting fans.

5. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer’s outlet factors

and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet

volumes to permit a cross-check with required fan volumes.

6. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate

duct traverses.

7. Place outlet dampers in the full open position.

8. Prepare schematic diagrams of system “as-built” ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate

reporting.

9. Verify that all motors and bearings are lubricated.

10. Verify that Volume, fire and smoke dampers are properly installed and

functional.

11. Verify that supply, return exhaust and transfer grilles, registers, diffusers, terminal units

with controls and filters are installed properly.

12. Verify that air handling systems, units, duct systems and associated apparatus, such as

heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc. are correctly blanked and/or

sealed to eliminate by-pass or leakage of air.



13. Verify that fans operating at full load and verify for freedom vibration, proper fan

rotation and belt tension and those elements in motor starters to be of proper size and

rating.

14. Verify proper installation of duct mounted smoke detectors.

15. Verify that mixing boxes set to maximum, minimum and outlets balanced within 10% of

design CFM.

16. With supply system in maximum mode, proportion return inlets, traverse and adjust

dampers to design cfm. Re-measure and adjust return inlets within 10% of design cfm.

Record all final traverse and static pressure data.

17. With supply system in the maximum mode, adjust minimum outside air damper to

design through pitot tube traverse. Measure and record traverse and static pressure.

18. After completion, take total air handling unit static profile and record all final statics,

amperage rpm, cfm, etc.

G. KITCHENS

a. Kitchen hoods and dishwasher (condensate) hoods:

i. Kitchen/Cafeteria ventilation and make-up air systems shall be

active in order to properly balance hood.

ii. Doors intended to be closed during operation shall be closed to

properly balance hood.

iii. Velocities through the filters shall be measured, adjusted and

recorded to comply with manufacturer’s recommendation.

iv. Hood capturing capabilities shall be verified by turning appliances

on and providing a smoke test around the perimeter of the hood.

The test shall be noted on the TAB report with the outcome

indicated along with remarks.

b. Kitchen Space

i. The perimeter doors around the kitchen shall be tested to verify that excess

negative static does not exist through the use of a smoke test. The test shall be

noted on the TAB report with the outcome indicated along with remarks.

ii. The Kitchen averaged static pressure shall be slightly negative approximately in

the range between -0.005” to -0.025” water column and recorded on the TAB

report with the outcome indicated along with remarks.

H. CONTROL SYSTEMS

1. Verify that control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and

functional, including electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire

and freeze stats, temperature/humidity sensors and high and low limit switches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPORTS

A. Four copies of the final reports shall be submitted on applicable Reporting Forms for review.

B. Each individual final Reporting Form submitted must bear the signature of the person who

recorded the data and the signature of the TAB supervisor of the performing firm. Identification



of all types of instruments used and their last dates of calibration will be submitted with the final

report.

3.2 GUARANTEE

A. The NEBB certified firm guarantees that all testing and balancing work will be performed in

accordance with NEBB standards and procedures and shall provide evidence of their certification

for the Engineer or designated Owner’s representative.



INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230700 - 1

SECTION 23 07 00 - INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Conditions of the contract and Division I apply to this Division except that any requirements for

prior approval of equipment does not apply to this Division. The work under this section consists of furnishing and installing all thermal insulation on ducts, and all other equipment in Division 23 which are indicated to receive insulation. See also Section 23 05 00 for General Requirements applying to this and all other Division 23 sections.

1.2 SUBMITTAL DATA

The following submittal data shall be provided before any installation is made: Name of the Insulation Contractor; a narrative summary of material and method of installation for each system or component to be insulated (i.e. domestic water piping, ductliner, etc.); certified letter of compliance as required hereinafter; and descriptive literature for all material including insulation, covering, jackets, adhesives, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL INSULATION

All insulation materials shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM-84, NFPA-255, and UL 723 not exceeding: smoke developed - 50; flame spread - 25; fuel contributed - 50. All components of the insulation (insulation, adhesives, and jackets or facings) shall have been tested as COMPOSITE product and shall bear labels showing the flame spread, smoke-developed, and fuel contributed properties do not exceed 25, 50 and 50 respectively. All insulation accessories (glass cloth, cement, adhesives, mastic, etc.) shall have the same component ratings as listed above. All products and/or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame, fuel and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. Paper laminate jacket, if used, shall be permanently fire and smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity. The use of canvas or other flammable materials is prohibited and any found on the job shall be removed at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. The insulation and related items specified hereinafter by specific manufacturer's designation is intended to establish a standard of quality and is not intended to exclude equal products of reputable manufacturers. Acceptable manufacturers: Owens Corning, Johns Manville, Knauf, or approved equal.

2.2 DUCT SYSTEMS

A. All metal air conditioning return ducts or ducts exposed/ visible from occupied space shall be

lined with thermal and acoustic ductliner, Manville Linacoustic or approved equal, approved by

the City of El Paso, 1-1/2 pound per cubic foot density, 1 1/2" thick or equivalent unless

otherwise noted on the plans having a thermal conductance of 0.25 BTU/sq. ft./hr./degree F./inch

thickness at 75F. mean temperature and with a noise reduction coefficient (NCR) of .20,

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. fire hazard classification of flame spread 25, fuel contributed 50

and smoke developed 50 or better.


INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230700 - 2

B. Ductwrap shall be used on all refrigerated and heated ducts installed in concealed areas.

Ductwrap shall be Manville Microlite Duct Insulation, 1.0 PCF density, 2" thick with a thermal conductivity equal to .265 at 75 degrees F. Wrap shall have an FSK fiberglass reinforced foil face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSULATION

A. Ducts indicated to have internal insulation shall be lined by carefully adhering the liner in a continuous piece to clean, flat metal sheets with quick-tacking rubber base adhesive. The duct shall be formed, with the liner attached, in a sheet brake. The coated side of the liner shall face the air stream, and all exposed edges shall be coated with adhesive. Ducts shall also have the liner additionally secured with mechanical fasteners. Spacing of fasteners shall be on approximately fifteen inches (15") centers, and shall be adhered with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. The insulation shall be held in place with surface anchor washers, speed clips or equal. All projecting ends of fasteners shall be cut off flush with washer.

B. Ductwrap shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Wrap shall be

continuous with overlapping sections. Fasten and seal overlap joints according to manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Insulation shall be butted tightly at joints and vapor barrier facing shall be overlapped a minimum

of two (2") inches. Insulation should be removed from lap prior to stapling. All seams shall be stapled approximately six (6") inches on center with outward clinching staples, then sealed with a foil vapor barrier tape or vapor barrier mastic.

D. Where ducts are over 14" in width, the ductwrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of

rectangular ducts with mechanical fasteners spaced on 18" centers (maximum) to prevent sagging of insulation. Seal penetrations of facing so as to provide a vapor-tight system.

3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

Data sheets for duct insulation systems. Adhesives, and Fitting and valve covers.



____________________________________________________________________________________

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1

SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL Related Documents: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Description of Work: A. This section specified several categories of provisions for electrical work including:

1. Certain adaptive expansions of requirements specified in Division 01, 2. General performance requirements within the electrical systems as a whole,

and, 3. General work to be performed as electrical work, because of its close association.

Summary of Electrical Work: A. Refer to the E-series drawings for graphic representations, schedules and notations showing electrical work. B. Refer to the Division 26 sections for the primary technical specifications of electrical work. Coordination of Electrical Work: A. Refer to the Division 01 sections for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work.

It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the electrical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and mechanical work, and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Arrange electrical work in a neat, well organized manner with conduit and similar services running

parallel with primary lines of the building construction and with a minimum of 7’0” o.c. where possible. C. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire

electrical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. D. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of

electrical work (equipment). E. Contractor to identify all electrical circuits that serve the areas where no work will be performed and

all existing exterior circuits so that they are re-connected to the corresponding panel. Coordinating Drawings: A. For locations where several elements of electrical (or combined mechanical and electrical) work must

be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare coordination drawings (shop drawings) showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate scale) required for the installation if deemed necessary by Architect or Engineer. Prepare and submit these coordination drawings, if required, prior to purchase-fabrication-installation of any of these elements involved in the coordination.


____________________________________________________________________________________


B. The Drawings and these Specifications are complementary, each one to the other, and what is called

for in one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications and report any discrepancies affecting the work to the Architect. The Architect will issue such written instructions or interpretations as may be required.

C. The Electrical Plans are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and the

work of the other trades will allow. Such minor changes as are necessary to make the electrical work conform to the work of other trades and to the building shall be made without cost to the Owner.

D. Circuits and feeders shall be as shown and no deviations from the indicated outlet-circuit grouping

will be permitted, except by permission of the Architect. Branch circuit numbers are for guidance only and need not necessarily conform to the finished job. Actual circuit numbers used shall be recorded on "As-built" drawings.

E. The maximum number of circuits combined in one raceway shall be two. The circuits shown on the

plan can be combined but must be shown on the 'AS BUILT' drawings. Quality Assurance and Standards: A. Refer to Division 01 for general administrative/procedural requirements related to compliance with

codes and standards. Specifically, for the work (in addition to standards specified in individual work sections), the following standards are imposed, as applicable to the work in each instance:

AWS standards for welding ANSI C 2, National Electrical Safety Code ANSI C 73, Dimensions of Attachment Plugs and Receptacles NECA standards for installation NEMA standards for materials and products.

Laws, Codes and Ordinances: A. All work and material shall conform to the requirements of O.S.H.A. and all National, and State Laws

and ordinances having jurisdiction at the job site. The (N.E.C.) National Electrical Code 2011 Edition, or latest edition being enforced, shall be strictly adhered to; N.E.C. requirements are considered "minimum requirements". Where requirements of the Contract Documents exceed N.E.C., the Contract Document governs. This Contractor shall be licensed to work in the local area.

B. Specialty subcontractor (Fire Alarm, Security Systems, if applicable), shall be duly licensed by the

State of Texas to sell, install and service Fire Alarm and Security Systems. All employees shall be duly registered and records maintained as required by applicable State of Texas laws. The Specialty Contractor shall submit a copy of his fire alarm and security systems license at the time of product submittal.

C. The latest A.D.A. requirements governing this project must be adhered to. D. Secure permits and pay permit and inspection fee as required by local authorities. E. Upon completion of the work, furnish to the Owner a certificate of final inspection and approval from

the electrical inspection bureau having jurisdiction. F. All electrical systems shall be grounded in strict accordance with the requirements of the National

Electrical Code.


____________________________________________________________________________________


G. All electrical requirements must be coordinated with the local electric utility for temporary and

permanent service. Submittal: A. Refer to the Division 01 for general requirements conceding work related and administrative

submittal. All descriptive and technical data and shop drawings shall bear signed certification to the effect that they have been carefully examined and found to the correct with respect to dimension, space available, non-interference with other trades and that the equipment complies with all the requirements of these specifications. Where catalog data is submitted, the proposed items shall be clearly "flagged" or otherwise identified, so that no confusion exists. Without the above certification shop drawings and submittal will no be approved.

B. Reproduced copies of product data showing pictures of item to be submitted shall be clear, sharp and

show product in detail. Reproduced copies where product picture is not clear or blurred will not be accepted.

C. Submittal shall be separated into the following categories.

(1) Lighting Fixtures and Lamps (2) Wiring Devices (3) Switchgear (including Switchboards, Panelboards and Motor Control Centers) (4) Motor/Circuit Disconnects and Transformers (6) Special Systems (including Fire Alarm, P.A., Program/Clock, and Intrusions Alarm), if applicable.

D. Each category shall be separately bound in booklet form; loose sheets or sheets merely stapled

together without report/presentation cover or soft-cover will not be accepted. E. Submittal which are not separated into the above mentioned categories and/or not appropriately

bound will not be accepted. Temporary Facilities: A. Refer to the Division 01 sections for general requirements on temporary facilities. Except for self-

contained facilities, connect and terminate electrical temporary facilities at the locations indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, at locations as determined by the Contractor to fulfill project requirements.

B. Do not interrupt or disrupt power service to existing facilities of the Owner or others, except with

prearrangement and agreement on time of interruption as needed to make temporary connection for temporary power service.

C. Do not subject electrical facilities (either temporary work or temporary use of permanent work) to

higher demand or loading than designed for. Where this conditions present, the electrical subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining temporary electrical power from the local electric utility. All charges for temporary service shall be borne by the General Contractor under his bid price. Location, size and type for service shall be compatible to job requirements.

D. When temporary electrical service is no longer needed for construction work, remove electrical

temporary facilities and temporary provisions of all permanent electrical work. Repair and restore (or replace) work damaged by installation and operation of electrical systems which have been used to provide temporary services, to the condition of new and unused work except for normal wear.


____________________________________________________________________________________


E. Electrical work installed as temporary facilities shall, upon removal, remain property of the Installer. F. Replace worn parts of permanent electrical work, where used as temporary facilities prior to the

Owner's acceptance and assumed operation. Where lamps of permanent electrical light fixtures have been used for temporary lighting, replace lamps which have burned out or are noticeable dimmed by temporary use.

Products, Electrical Work: A. Refer to Division 01 sections for general requirements on products, materials and equipment. The

following provisions expand or modify the requirement as applicable to electrical work. B. Prepare the product listing for electrical work, separate from the listing(s) of products for other work.

Include listing of each significant item of equipment and material used in work; and indicate the generic name, product name, manufacturer, model number, and related specification section number(s). Material such as conductors, conduit and boxes taken from installer's stock need not be listed.

C. For principal equipment items, list the input/output ratings. D. Submit list within 30 days of Contract Date. E. All material shall be new and shall bear the label of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or be listed

under reexamination service. All materials shall be of the best grade and latest pattern of manufacturer as specified. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall present a neat mechanical appearance when completed.

F. Provide products which are compatible with other products of the electrical work and with other work

requiring interface with the electrical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed electrical work, coordinate colors and finishes with other work.

Electrical Product Substitution: A. Manufacturer's catalog numbers are specified for the purpose of establishing a standard.

Substitutions for electrical equipment, will be permitted, if submitted in writing, 14 days prior to the Bidding Date, for approval by the Architect/Engineer, as being equal to, or better than, the specified items in every respect. Electrical equipment, devices, etc. may have substitutions only in equal appearance, quality and function to, or better than, the specified item. Complete descriptive and technical data shall be submitted on all proposed substitute items, together with the same data on the specified items. Material samples of the proposed substitute item and the specified items shall be submitted for comparison and test if requested by the Architect/Engineer.

B. All requests for substitution of equipment shall be made in writing to the Architect no less than 14

days prior to bidding date, by each individual bidder, with the certification that the "substitute item" is equal in appearance, quality and function or better than the specified item in every detail. The certification shall be signed by the individual holding the Master Electricians' License.

C. If notice of approval has NOT been published by the bid date, the request for substitution is

disapproved.


____________________________________________________________________________________


PARTS 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION Electrical System Identification: A. Provide engraved plastic laminated nameplates at locations of major units of electrical equipment

including panelboards, control centers and similar systems. Additional and specific nameplate requirements appear in other Division 26 Sections.

Cutting and Patching: A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 for the cutting and patching of other work to

accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as individually authorized by the Architect/Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work not permitted.

B. Do not cut structural framing, walls, floors, decks and other members intended to withstand stress,

except with the Architect's or Engineer's written authorization. Authorization will be granted only where there is no other reasonable method for completing the electrical work, and where the proposed cutting clearly does not materially weaken the structure.

C. Where patching is required to restore other work because of either cutting or other damage inflicted

during the installation of electrical work, engage the original Installer to complete the patching of the other work. Restore the other work in every respect, including the elimination of visual defects in exposed finished, and judged by the Architect.

Excavating For Electrical Work: A. The work of this article is defined to include whatever excavating and backfilling in the same area,

including dewatering, flood protection provisions and other temporary facilities. Coordinate the work with other work in the same area, including other underground services (existing and new), landscape development, paving, and floor slab on grade. Coordinate with weather conditions and provide temporary facilities needed for protection and proper performance of excavating and backfilling.

Concrete for Electrical Work: A. The work of this article is defined to include whatever concrete work in necessary or shown

specifically to install the electrical work; but excluding equipment base grouting (see applicable Division 26 sections). Coordinate the work with other work, particularly other concrete work and accessories.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable provisions of Division 03 sections for electrical

work concrete, including form work, reinforcement, mix design, materials (If not noted on drawings, use mix designs and materials accepted for Division 03 work where possible), admixtures, accessories (including water stops), placing of wet concrete, finishing, curing, protecting, testing, submittal and other requirements of the concrete work. Refer instances of uncertain applicability to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before proceeding.

Electrical Work Closeout: A. Refer to the Division 01 sections for general closeout requirements. Upon completion of the work, the

various systems operated under load conditions shall be tested for short circuits and grounds in accordance with the method and resistance values outlined in the National Electrical Code and for


____________________________________________________________________________________


load balance on feeders and branch circuits. B. The complete system shall operate satisfactorily in every respect. Make any repairs or adjustments

necessary to this end to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing

C. Coordinate closeout operations with closeout of mechanical systems and other power consuming

equipment. Accurately record on "as-built" drawings locations of all conduits which are underground or otherwise concealed. Test run electrical equipment in coordination with test runs of mechanical system. Clean and lubricate operational equipment. Instruct Owner's operating personnel thoroughly in the operation, sequencing, maintenance and safety/emergency provision of the electrical systems. Turn over the operations to the Owner's personnel at the time(s) of substantial completion. Until the time of final acceptance of the total work of the Contract, respond promptly with consultation and services to assist the Owner's personnel with operation of the electrical systems.

D. It shall be the responsibility of this contractor to verify electrical characteristics and horsepower of

mechanical equipment supplied at job site with that shown on Drawings. In the event that the Mechanical and/or Plumbing contractor furnish equipment of different horsepower and/or electrical characteristics from that shown on the Drawings, he shall pay ALL costs required to furnish the proper electrical facilities.

Notification of Discrepancies: A. This Contractor shall study the Drawings and compare the layout of the electrical system, program

and clock system, telephone system and integrated communication system to determine that: 1. The system covers the units and is required, from a functional, as well as a Code point of

view. No area of coverage has been omitted. 2. The system has the appropriate conductors, pairs or cables in the appropriate raceway,

connected to the end devices and interconnections to other systems has been shown. Raceway is of adequate size to contain conductors or cables.

3. The system apparatus required to perform the function has been specified. 4. Discrepancies in description of equipment or materials shown on the Drawings or described

in the Specifications are brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer. B. This Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer 14 WORKING DAYS prior to Bid Opening of any

discrepancies he has found. In the event this Contractor fails to notify the Architect/Engineer, it will be assumed any and all discrepancies have been found by this Contractor and he has included sufficient money in his bid to correct them.

Guarantee: A. The work to be performed shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after final acceptance against

faulty workmanship and/or materials, and any failure or trouble due to such causes within the period of guarantee shall be made good upon demand of the Owner and without cost to the owner.

Miscellaneous Items: A. Miscellaneous items not covered in these specifications shall be as indicated on the drawings,

installed and connected in the proper method and as recommended by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


____________________________________________________________________________________

EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 260503 - 1

SECTION 26 05 03 - EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 basic Materials and Methods section and is part of each Division-26

section referring to electrical connections specified herein.

Description of Work:

A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical

connections are hereby defined to include, but not necessarily be limited to, connections for

providing electrical power to equipment.

B. Types of electrical connections specified in this section include the following:

To motors

To motor starters

From motor starters to motors

To lighting fixtures

C. Motor starters and controls not furnished integrally with equipment are specified in applicable

Division-26 sections.

D. Refer to other Division-26 section for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for motors

and other electrical units of equipment; not work of this section.

E. Temperature Controls for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning shall be done under Division-23

Specifications.

F. Low voltage thermostat wiring shall be done under Division 23; this Contractor shall furnish empty

conduit with pull string only.

G. High voltage (line) thermostat wiring shall be #12 THHN (if applicable), unless otherwise noted on

Drawings. Number of conductors to each thermostat shall be as shown on Drawings; as indicated by

number of hachure marks. Where no hachure marks are shown, a minimum of 2 conductors shall be

assumed. This Contractor shall verify number of conductors required with Division 23

Specifications, Mechanical drawings, Mechanical schedules and equipment wiring diagrams.

Quality Assurance:

A. Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type of products used and installation of electrical

power connections (Terminals and splices), junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches.

B. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to electrical connections for


____________________________________________________________________________________


equipment.

C. Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical

connections.

D. Provide electrical connection products and materials which have been listed and labeled by the

Underwriters Laboratories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Materials and Components:

A. For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly of materials, including but not

necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminal (lugs), electrical insulating tape, electrical solder,

electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other

items and accessories as need to complete splices and terminations of the type indicated.

Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings:

A. Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of the types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses)

indicated for each type service. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as

determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements; comply with NEC requirements for raceways.

Provide products complying with Division-26 basic materials and methods section "Electrical

Raceways", and in accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and fittings.

Rigid non-metallic conduit

Rigid steel conduit

Rigid metal conduit fittings

Electrical metallic tubing

EMT fittings

Flexible metal conduit

Flexible metal conduit fittings

Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit

Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings

PVC covered rigid metal conduit

PVC covered rigid metal conduit fittings

A. Provide full length pull wire in ALL empty conduits to facilitate the future installation of conductors.

Wire, Cable and Connectors:

A. Provide wires, cables and connectors complying with Division-26 basic materials and methods

section "Wires and Cables".

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/conductors for electrical connections which match wires/

conductors of wiring supplying power.

C. Provide electrical connectors and terminals as recommended by connector and terminal manufacturer

for intended application.


____________________________________________________________________________________


Electrical Connection Accessories:

A. Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and bolts, solder, electrical

soldering flux, wire nuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for

type services indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS

Installation of Electrical Connections:

A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with connector manufacturer's written

instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with requirements of NEC and

NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, mate and match

conductors of electrical connection for proper interface between electrical power supplies and

installed equipment.

C. Cover splices with electrical insulation equivalent to, or of a higher rating than, insulation on the

conductors being spliced.

D. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering, armor, jacket and insulation properly to

ensure a uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated.

E. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and

maintenance.

F. Tighten wire-binding connector screws firmly.

G. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for connection of all motors.

H. Coordinate insulation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation.

I. Perform all work in conformance with job requirements, other applicable sections of these

specifications, governing

Codes and ordinances, and manufacture's instructions.

J. If the Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor furnishes equipment with horsepowers or electrical

characteristics different from that shown on the drawings, he shall pay all costs required to furnish the

proper electrical facilities.

K. Motor starters and motor control devices that are not an integral part of the mechanical equipment


____________________________________________________________________________________


will be turned over to this contractor for installation and connection.

Electrical Equipment Identification:

A. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved

nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 3/64" thick, 3-ply, black surfaces and

white core. Engraving shall be Roman Gothic, at least 3/8" high appropriately spaced.

B. Nameplates shall be attached by the use of #2 chromium plated, self-tapping, flat head Phillips

screws, no rivets or adhesives. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its

make number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be

identified with nameplate shall include, but not be limited to, the following.

Air Conditioning Controls Contractors

Individually Enclosed C.B.'s Relays

Panelboards Disconnect Switches

Motor Control Centers Switchboards

Starters Low Voltage Relay Panels

C. Nameplates for panelboards, motor control centers and switchboards shall be furnished and installed

at factory by manufacturer of equipment. Refer to respective Division-26 sections for additional

nameplate requirements.

D. Air washer and exhaust fan disconnect switches shall have engraved nameplates, screwed to the

outside cover of disconnect, with mechanical designation and room number served by the unit, (i.e.,

"EF-1, GYM-101"). Room numbers shall be those finally selected by the Owner; not necessarily

those shown on the Contract Documents.

E. Complete all identification cards (directories) for switches, starters, and other devices in all

distribution, lighting and applicable panelboards and similar pieces of equipment, on a typewriter in a

neat manner and insert the card in the card holder behind a piece of clear plastic. Where the card size

is insufficient for the proper identification of all circuits, the index shall be made on a large sheet of

paper of proper proportion, and then photo-reduced to fit the card holder.

F. Remote light switches and all control and equipment switches (i.e., exhaust fans, etc.) shall be

identified by ENGRAVING the switchplate and NOT by micarta nameplate. Plates shall be stainless

steel as hereinafter specified. Engraving shall be 3/16" Roman gothic, and shall be filled with black

enamel. Nomenclature shall include the area, control, or equipment served.


____________________________________________________________________________________


END OF SECTION


____________________________________________________________________________________

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division-01 Specifications sections apply to work of this section.


A. The extent of electrical cable and electrical wire work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. The applications for cable, wire and connectors required on the project as follows:

Power and lighting distribution circuitry

Equipment connections and control circuitry

Fire Alarm System circuitry

Public Address circuitry

Program and Clock circuitry

Quality Assurance:

A. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), latest edition, as applicable to construction

and installation of electrical cable, wire and connectors.

B. Provide electrical cable, wire and connectors which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters

Laboratories.

C. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA/Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association

standards pertaining to materials, construction and testing wire cable.

D. Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM standards pertaining to construction of wire and

cable.

E. Comply with applicable portions of IEEE standards pertaining to construction of wire and cable.

Submittal:

A. Submit manufacturer's data on electrical cable, wire and connectors when requested by the

Engineer and/or Architect. Refer to Section 26 05 00 for additional requirement on product data

submittal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Cable, Wire and Connectors:

A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide cable, wire and connectors of manufacturer standard


____________________________________________________________________________________


materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as

recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for the installation.

WIRE:

B. Provide factory-fabricated wire of the size, rating, materials and type as indicated for each

service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with

installation requirements and with NEC Standards. Select from only the following types,

materials, conductor configurations, insulations, and covering:

UL Type: THW

UL Type: THHN/THWN (dual rated)

UL Type: THWN

Material: Copper

Conductors: Solid (AWG 20 to 10 only)

Conductors: Concentric-lay-stranded (standard flexibility)

CABLE:

A. Provide factory-fabricated cable of sizes, ratings, materials and jacketing/sheating as indicated for

each type service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by installer to

comply with installation requirements and with NEC Standards.

B. Conductors #6 AWG and larger shall by type THW or THWN. Conductors #8 and smaller shall

be type THHN/THWN. Except that #14 AWG for class 2 remote control and signal circuits may

be commercial fixture wire type RF-2 or TF. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity, copper.

Insulation types THW, THHN/THWN #2 AWG and smaller, for the purpose of this specification

shall have a capacity of the same size wire with 60 degrees Celsius insulation.

C. All wire on this project shall be new, unused, in good condition and shall be delivered in standard

coils, packages and reels. Samples of all wire shall be submitted by the Contractor when so

requested by the Owner’s duly authorized representative for the purpose of determining

acceptability of the wire. Wire which has been rejected by the Owner or Owner's representative

shall not be used again. Such rejected wire shall be removed from the Owner's premises

forthwith. Decision as to the quality of the wire furnished and the acceptance of such wire shall

be made by the Owner's duly authorized representative.

D. No conductor smaller than #12 wires shall be used for lighting purposes. In the case of

"homeruns", no conductor smaller than a #10 wire shall be used for runs over 50 feet in length on

120v circuits.


____________________________________________________________________________________


E. The sizing of all wire, except remote-control wire, shall be accomplished in the case of both

feeder and branch circuits by conforming to the following provisions:

F. The voltage drop in the case of 120/208 volts shall not exceed 3.0% at maximum load and 80.0%

power factor. Service and feeder shall not exceed 1.0% voltage drop at maximum load and 85%

power factor, iron conduit only considered.

G. Conductors of #10 and smaller sizes of wire shall be solid members unless otherwise specifically

called for on the plans. Conductors #8 and larger sizes of wire shall be stranded conductors unless

otherwise specifically called for on the plans. The color of the wire shall be selected to conform

to all instances to the following table:

COLOR-PHASE TABLE FOR WIRE

208 VOLT SYSTEM 480 VOLT SYSTEM

Neutral White Neutral Grey

Phase A Black Phase A Brown

Phase B Red Phase B Orange

Phase C Blue Phase C Yellow

Grounding Conductor - Green Grounding Conductor - Green

H. Should tape be used for color coding, it shall cover not less than 6" of conductor within enclosure

wherever possible. Color coding shall be with tape such as that manufactured by the Minnesota

Mining and Manufacturing Company for this purpose.

I. Remote-control wires, other than Class-2 Remote Control and Signal circuits, shall be no smaller

than #14 conductors. Control wires shall be run in separate conduits.

J. Lighting fixtures shall not be used for raceways for circuit other than parallel wiring of fixtures.

K. When leaving a metal raceway or conduit in a cabinet, box, switch enclosure, control enclosure

or any other like member, conductors shall be protected by means of insulated bushings or end

fittings.

L. Conductors may be run in multiple size 1/0 to 500 MCM inclusive, provided all multiple

conductors are the same size, length and type of insulation. Not more than three conductors may

be run in multiple, and they shall be so arranged and terminated as to insure equal division of the

total current between all conductors involved. Where multiple connections are contemplated,

approval of the Owner's duly representative must be obtained before installation is made.

Connectors:


____________________________________________________________________________________


A. Provide factory-fabricated, metal compression type connectors of sizes, rating, materials, types

and classes as indicated for each service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as

determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and NEC standards. NO SET

SCREW CONNECTORS OR COUPLINGS ALLOWED.

B. No splices or taps shall be made in any conductors except in outlet boxes, pullboxes, panelboard

boxes, manholes, splice boxes or other exposed locations. All taps and splices shall be made with

solderless connections and insulated in a manner providing an effective insulation equal to that of

the adjoining wire. Any splice or tap shall be made only on such conductors as are a component

part of a single circuit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Installer:

A. Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as indicated, in compliance with the manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation",

and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation

work, as necessary for proper interface. Prior to pulling cables or conductors into raceways,

inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and construction debris.

C. Pull conductors together where more than one is being installed in a raceway. Care shall be

exercised while installing wire in conduits so as not to injure conductor insulation. Bending

radius of insulated wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended values.

D. Use pulling compound or lubricant, when necessary; compound must not deteriorate conductor

and insulation, and shall be U.L. listed.

E. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which can not damage the raceway.

Maximum pulling tension of any wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended

values.

F. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. Splices shall not be permitted except in junction boxes,

outlet boxes or as previously listed in this section. Splices must be accessible.

H. Install splices and taps which have mechanical strength and insulation rating equivalent-or-better

than conductor.

I. Use splice and tap conductors which are compatible with the conductor material.

J. Provide nylon pull wire for every empty raceway to facilitate the future installation of wires.

Field Quality Control:

A. Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry and also for short circuits.

Correct malfunction when detected.

B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in


____________________________________________________________________________________


accordance with requirements.

END OF SECTION


____________________________________________________________________________________

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 260533 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Condition

and Division-01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods Section, and is part of each Division-

26 section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein.


A. The extent of raceways is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. The types of raceways in this section include the following:

Electrical metallic tubing

Flexible metal conduit

Intermediate metal conduit

Liquid-Tight flexible metal

Rigid metal conduit

Underground plastic utilities duct

Quality Assurance:

B. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways.

C. Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems;

and provide products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled.

D. Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway

systems.

Submittal:

A. Submit manufacturer's data on electrical raceways when requested by Engineer and/or Architect.

Refer to Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements of product data submittal.

Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:

A. Provide color-coded end cap thread protectors on exposed threads of metal conduit.

B. Handle conduit and tubing carefully to prevent bending and end-damage, and to avoid scoring

finish.

C. Store pipe and tubing inside and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate

well above grade and enclose with durable watertight wrapping.


____________________________________________________________________________________


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Materials and Components:

A. For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide assembly of conduit, tubing or duct and

fittings including but not necessarily limited to connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, strap,

bushings, expansion joints, hangers and other components and accessories as needed for a

complete system.

B. Each length of rigid conduit shall have both ends threaded. The extremities shall be reamed to

remove all burrs and sharp edges. Each length of conduit shall be marked with the name and

trademark of the manufacturer and the stamp of approval of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

C. Each length of conduit shall be provided with one coupling attached and the threads of the end of

the conduits having no coupling shall be protected by use of suitable thread protectors. All

couplings and other fittings such as bends or elbows shall be protected against corrosion in the

same manner in which the conduit itself is protected. All bends for conduit of 1-1/4" or larger

shall either be factory manufactured elbows or be made by the use of a bending machine meeting

the approval of the Owner's duly authorized representative. Under no circumstances shall any

bend be installed if the conduit from which it is fabricated is injured in any manner in the course

of, or by, the bending process. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any field bend shall

not be less than the recommendation of the National Electrical Code. Under no circumstances

shall the internal cross section area of any conduit be appreciably reduced by any bending

process.

D. EMT connectors and couplings shall be of the watertight threaded compression type, having steel

gland nuts. Indenter or threadless type fittings are prohibited. NO SET SCREW CONNECTORS

OR COUPLINGS ALLOWED.

E. Conduits 1/2" and 3/4" trade size may be installed in concrete slabs, or near to the center of the

slab as possible.

F. Conduits installed in direct contact with the earth, except where PVC is indicated and/or specified

shall be rigid galvanized steel, field spirally wrapped (half-lapped) with one layer of 1" wide 3M

Scotchrap #50 plastic tape with a 50% overlap, including all joints or couplings, or shall be

coated with a bonded, 20 mil minimum thickness PVC, permanently fused at the factory,

Pittsburgh Standard Co., "Plasti-Bond", or approved equal. At Contractor's option PVC

externally coated rigid steel conduit may be used without spiral wrap.

G. On all circuit conduits, 1/2" to 6", this contractor shall use O.S. Electrical Manufacturing Co.

Type IBC-L-BC insulated conduit bushings for all conductors #6 and up where they enter or

leave the cabinet box.


____________________________________________________________________________________


H. Where thin wall conduit is terminated into cabinet, junction box, outlet box, pull box, auxiliary

gutter, etc., the conduit shall be secured with a nylon insulated throat compression type box

connector. All thin wall conduit couplings shall be compression type only.

I. Ground clamps shall be provided on conduits stubbed up into the motor control center, panel

board or switchboard and all conduits connected to the ground bus.

Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings:

A. Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thickness) for

each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection

determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of

NEC for raceways.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: FS WW-CO581 and ANSI C80.1.

C. Intermediate Steel Conduit: FS WW-C-581.

D. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 and NEMA std. Pub. No. RN 1.

E. Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-408, types, kinds and styles as indicated.

F. EMT: FS WW-C 563 and ANSI C80.3.

G. EMT Fittings: FS W-F-408; types, classes and kinds as indicated.

H. Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-566, Type II, zinc coated steel. Aluminum, Type I, not

acceptable.

I. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS WW-F-406; Types 1, Class 1

STYLE A

A. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit; constructed of

single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked and double-wrapped steel; galvanized inside and

outside; coat with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). SHALL NOT be used

for outdoor installations.

B. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406; Type 1, Class 3, Style G.

C. Non-metallic Conduit, Ducts and Fittings:

D. Provide non-metallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for

each service allowed. Where types are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by the

Installer to fulfill the wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for

raceways.

E. PVC Conduit and tubing Fittings: NEMA stds. No. TC 2 PVC Schedule 40 minimum.


____________________________________________________________________________________


F. Underground PVC Plastic Utilities Duct: Not Permitted.

G. Liquid-tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Not Permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Installation:

A. Install electrical raceways where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction,

applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation" and complying with

recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate with other work including metal and concrete deck work, as necessary to interface

installation of electrical raceways and components.

C. Conduit shall be provided for all wiring circuits as indicated. Material shall be exposed or

concealed as required by the Drawings. Exposed conduit shall be run straight and true to building

lines. All conduits shall be rigidly supported by means of straps or hangers best suited for work.

If ceiling support system is adequate, one 3/4" maximum conduit may be supported by a Caddy

clip to hanger wire. Multiple runs of conduits shall be racked on trapeze hangers. All support

materials shall be rust-proof. Perforated tape or wire shall not be used. DO NOT USE WIRE TO

SUPPORT OR ANCHOR ANY CONDUIT.

D. All ends of the conduit shall be properly reamed to remove rough edges and whenever a conduit

enters a box or other fitting, it shall be securely fastened by the use of a locknut inside and outside

of the box or fittings. An approve bushing shall be installed on the ends of all conduit in such a

manner as to protect the wire from abrasion. The Contractor shall so lay out and install the

conduit systems as to avoid all other services or systems, the proximity of which may prove

injurious to the conduit or conductors which it confines. All conduit systems except those

otherwise specifically shown to the contrary, shall be concealed in the building construction.

E. The contractor shall run all conduits in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's duly representative.

On exposed systems, support shall be provided at intervals of 6 feet. On concealed circuits,

support shall be provided at intervals of no more than 8 feet. No feeder conduit run shall be

longer than 80 feet between junction boxes, cabinets or circuit interrupting devices unless there

are no direction changes and only a straight-in-line pull of wire is involved. In such straight-in-

line runs between junction boxes, cabinets or circuit interrupting devices, a run not to exceed 100

feet in length may be made.

F. Boxes shall be square and flush with finished surfaces and suitable anchored in place.

G. Conduit installation shall be in strict accordance with the NEC and best current practice. Conduit

system shall be complete from pull to point to pull point before wire is pulled in it. Upon

completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and

construction debris.

H. Conduit crushed or otherwise deformed shall not be installed and shall be removed from the job

site without delay.


____________________________________________________________________________________


I. Conduit runs shall be sealed after installation to prevent accumulation of water, dirt and other

foreign materials. Conduit in which such accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign materials.

Conduit in which such accumulation occurs shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner's

representative or replaced.

J. Conduit crossing expansion joints shall be provided with suitable expansion fitting. Exposed

conduits below the five (5) foot level shall be galvanized rigid conduit.

K. Conduits exposed on room or other exterior (outdoor) locations, not in direct contact with earth,

shall be galvanized rigid steel or IMC.

L. EMT Steel tube may be used in sizes up to and including 2" in all interior work, except that it

SHALL NOT be used in concrete, underground, underfloor, in any damp or outdoor locations, or

in any location where there is a likelihood of mechanical injury.

M. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for all motor connections. Liquid tight flexible metal

conduit SHALL NOT be used for outdoor installations.

N. Flexible metal conduit shall be used ONLY for tap connections to lay-in lighting fixtures and in

accordance with NEC Article 410-117 (c).

O. Conduits routed above the acoustical "lay-in" ceilings shall be anchored to the building structure

and not on the ceiling. Wire shall not be used to anchor boxes to structure. Junction boxes shall

be installed on the structural members. Flexible metal conduits extended down to light fixtures

from junction boxes shall not exceed 6 ft. length and be in accordance with NEC Article 410-117

(c). Flexible metal conduit shall be strapped and/or supported such that it not lay atop acoustical

lay-in ceiling tile.

P. The Contractor shall so lay out and install conduit runs as to avoid close proximity to hot water

pipes. In no case shall a conduit be run within 3" of such pipes, except where crossings are

unavoidable and then the conduit shall be kept at least 1" from the covering on the pipe crossed.

Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs and above water and steam piping.

Q. The Contractor shall furnish and install a full length nylon pull cord in EVERY empty conduit

installed hereunder to facilitate the future installation of wires. Identify each terminus of pull wire

and linen tags and with complete information as to service and location of terminus of the cord.

R. Steel conduit may be embedded in concrete providing the outside diameter does not exceed 1/3

the thickness of the concrete lab, wall or beam is located entirely within the center third of the

member and the lateral spacing of conduits is not less than 3 diameters.

S. Non-metallic conduit or duct may be used for underground branch circuits, underground feeders

or underground service conduits only. Non-metallic conduit when installed outside of building

foundation shall be buried 24" below ground. When non-metallic conduit is extended underneath

building foundation concrete encasement is not required and conduit shall be buried 18" below

foundation. BEFORE STUBBING UP, ADAPT TO GALVANIZED RIGID ELBOWS. Elbows


____________________________________________________________________________________


shall be wrapped as indicated under MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS.

T. Non-metallic conduit is not permitted above grade or finished floor.

U. Contractor shall furnish and install a ground bonding conductor as required by NEC. This

Contractor shall size the ground conductor as per NEC Art. 250 taking voltage drop into

consideration. The addition of the grounding conductor may require an increase in conduit size

and conduit fill shall be computed using the appropriate NEC tables. This Contractor shall submit

recalculated branch, feeder or service conduit, taking the additional ground conductor into

account, to the Engineer for approval.

V. All non-metallic conduit or duct runs, whether shown on the Drawings or not, shall have a ground

bonding conductor, size as noted and/or as required by the NEC. The bond or equipment served

shall be grounded to a grounding conductor to provide a good return path to service panel.

W. This contractor shall be responsible for sealing all new conduit penetrations, through new and

existing walls, ceiling or floors. The seal shall be acceptable to Architect/Engineer and maintain

the integrity of the wall, ceiling or floor fire rating. 3M brand fire barrier caulk #CP-25 and putty

#303 are considered acceptable for this purpose.

X. All roof penetrations shall be done using "portal-plus" pre-molded flexible boot flashing.

END OF SECTION


____________________________________________________________________________________

OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 260534 - 1

SECTION 26 05 34 - OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each Division-26

section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein.


A. Extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and in schedules.

B. The types of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and in schedules.

C. The types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:

Outlet boxes

Junction boxes

Pullboxes

Conduit bodies

Bushings

Locknuts

Quality Assurance:

A. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings.

B. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which have been UL listed and labeled.

C. Comply with ANSI C134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub. No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet-steel outlets

boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Fabricated Materials:

A. Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet steel interior outlet wiring boxes of types, shapes and sizes

including box depths to suit each respective location and installation; construct with stamped

knockouts in back and sides and with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for

securing box covers and wiring devices.

B. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets,

wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet

boxes which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual

wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's option.


____________________________________________________________________________________


C. In standard partitions and suspended ceilings four inch octagonal boxes shall be 2-1/8" deep:

Appleton #40D1/2 (Universal 54171-1/2), 4" Oct. x 2-1/8" Deep, four 1/2" K.O.'s in sides, five 1/2"

K.O.'s in top.

Appleton #40DSPL (Universal 54171 SPL), 4" oct. x 2-1/8" Deep, two 1/2" K.O.'s and two 3/4"

K.O.'s in sides, three 1/2" K.O.'s and two 3/4" K.O.'s in top.

Appleton #40D3/4 (Universal 54171-3/4), 4" Oct. x 2-1/8" Deep four 3/4" K.O.'s in sides, three 1/2"

K.O.'s and two 3/4" K.O.'s in top.

D. In standard partitions and suspended ceilings where conduits of greater size than 3/4" are employed

boxes shall be 4" square, 1-1/2" deep:

Appleton #4SDI (Universal 53171-1) 4" Sq. x 2-1/8" Deep, Eight 1" K.O.'s in sides, three 1/2" & two

3/4" K.O.'s in top.

E. In thin partitions measuring 3-1/2" or less, boxes shall be 4" square, 1-1/2" deep:

Appleton #4S3/4 (Universal 5251-3/4), 4" sq. x 1-1/2" deep, Eight 3/4" K.O.'s in sides, three 2" and

two 3/4" in top.

F. All wall or bracket outlets using octagon boxes shall be equipped with 3/8" no-bolt fixture stud.

G. Switch and outlet boxes shall use the same size boxes as specified above. Provide boxes with the

appropriate covers and with required "raise" to finish flush with surface.

H. The following requirements shall apply to exposed as well as concealed conduit systems. When

"gang" arrangements of outlets are employed 2-3/4" deep "gang" boxes shall be used. These "gang"

boxes shall have dimensions which are not smaller than those shown in the following table.

NUMBER IN GANG SIZE

3 4 - 1/2" x 8 -5/8"

4 4 - 1/2" x 10 -1/2"

5 4 - 1/2" x 12 -1/4"

6 4 - 1/2" x 14"

7 4 - 1/2" x 16"

8 4 - 1/2" x 17 -3/4"

I. Where "gang" boxes are located in woodwork or in wooden partitions, the depth of the boxes shall be

reduced to 1 - 3/4".

J. Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes of types, shapes and sizes,

including depth of boxes with threaded conduit ends, cast metal face plates with spring-hinged

waterproof caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-

resistant fasteners.


____________________________________________________________________________________


K. Provide galvanized code gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes with screw-on covers; of types,

shapes and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped

with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. Outdoor pullboxes shall be cast iron NEMA 4.

L. Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes, to suite respective locations

and installation, construct with threaded-conduit-entrance ends, removable covers and corrosion-

resistant screws.

M. Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts, conduit bushings,

and offset connectors of types and sizes to suit respective uses and/or installation. Provide conduit

bushings and connectors as specified under Section 26 05 33 Raceway and boxes for Electrical

System.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Installation of Boxes and Fittings:

A. Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer written

instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in

compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work.

C. Special Systems Junction Boxes shall be painted in the following color scheme for easier

identification during construction and inspections (if applicable):

Red - Fire Alarm System

Blue - P.A. System

Yellow - Program and clock System

D. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.

Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.

E. Install boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring. Avoid using

round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box which would result in difficult and

insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surface. Fasten boxes

rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached or solidly embed electrical boxes in

concrete or masonry. Wire shall not be used to anchor boxes to structure. Provide electrical

connections for installed boxes.

F. All j-boxes must be clearly labeled, including circuit number, panel number and room in which it

originates.

END OF SECTION


____________________________________________________________________________________

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - OCCUPANCY SENSORS 260923 - 1

SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - OCCUPANCY SENSORS

PART 1- GENERAL

WORK INCLUDED:

A. Contractor's work to include all labor, materials, tools , appliances, control hardware, sensor,

wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and

furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described

herein.

B. Contractor/Supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related

electrical work required as work under Division 26.

C. Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable plans and

specifications, including but not limited to wiring , conduit, fixtures , HVAC systems and

building management systems.

D. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and

General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section.

EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION:

A. Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in

manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers

shall not be allowed, unless approve by engineer.

B. All components shall be U.L listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all state and local

applicable code requirements.

C. Wall switch products must be capable of with standing the effects of inrush current. Submittals

shall clearly indicate the method used.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

A. The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based

lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay

when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area.

B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space

utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.

C. Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be

undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with

specifications. The supplier's obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without

charge to the owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or

non-conforming and returned to the supplier The warranty shall commence upon the owner's

acceptance of the project Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year.

SUBMITIALS:


____________________________________________________________________________________


A. Manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to this specification by supplying the necessary

documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this specification must be

clearly stated by letter and submitted.

B. Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and

orientation of each sensor.

C. Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring.

D. Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications indicating

compliance to the specification.

E. Catalog sheets must clearly state any load restrictions when used with electronic ballasts.

SYSTEM OPERATION:

A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to make all proper adjustments to assure owner's

satisfaction with the occupancy system.

PART 2 - SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell Building Automation

Wattstopper

Leviton

B. The listing of any manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole

responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and

submittals made are for sensors which meet or exceed the specifications included herein.

PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION:

A. Manufacturer's catalog numbers are specified for the purpose of establishing a standard.

Substitutions for electrical equipment, will be permitted, if submitted in writing, 14 days prior to

the Bidding Date, for approval by the Architect/Engineer, as being equal to, or better than, the

specified items in every respect. Occupancy sensors may have substitutions only in equal

appearance, quality and function to, or better than, the specified item. Complete descriptive and

technical data shall be submitted on all proposed substitute items, together with the same data on

the specified items. Material samples of the proposed substitute item and the specified items shall

be submitted for comparison and test if requested by the Architect/Engineer.

B. All requests for substitution of equipment shall be made in writing to the Architect no less than

14 days prior to bidding date, by each individual bidder, with the certification that the "substitute

item" is equal in appearance, quality and function or better than the specified item in every detail.

The certification shall be signed by the individual holding the Master Electricians' License.

C. If notice of approval has NOT been published by the bid date, the request for substitution is

disapproved.


____________________________________________________________________________________


PRODUCTS:

A. All products shall be Wattstopper Building Automation product numbers:

1. Ceiling sensors:

2. Wall switches sensors:

3. Power and Auxiliary Packs:

B. Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of occupancy of major motion up to 1000

square feet at 180 degree coverage area.

C. Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads from 0 to 1,000 watts, fluorescent, at 120 volts; 0

to 1,800 watts, fluorescent, at 277 volts.

D. Wall switch products shall utilize Zero Arc Point Switching which increases relay life, protects

from the effects of inrush current, and increases sensor's longevity.

E. Wall switch sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode for

safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection.

F. Wall switch sensors shall provide a field selectable option to convert sensor operation from

automatic-ON to manual-ON.

H. Passive infrared sensors shall provide high immunity to false triggering from RFI (hand-held

radios) and EM! (Electrical noise on the line).

J. Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Fresnel lens, in a multipletier

configuration, with grooves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up.

K. Where specified, passive infrared ultrasonic and dual technology sensors shall offer daylighting

footcandle adjustment control and be able to accommodate dual level lighting.

L. Dual technology sensors shall be wall mounted, corner mounted or ceiling mounted in such a way

as to minimize coverage in unwanted areas.

M. Dual technology sensors shall consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for

occupancy detection. Products that react to noise or ambient sound shall not be considered.

N. Ultrasonic sensors shall utilize self adjusting sensibility to adjust the detection threshold

dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout

controlled space.

O. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled at 25 kHz within ± 0.005% tolerance,

32 kHz within ± 0.002% tolerance, or 40 kHz ± 0.002% tolerance to assure reliable performance

and eliminate sensor cross-talk. Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable.

P. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with LED drivers, electronic ballasts, PL lamp

systems and rated motor loads.


____________________________________________________________________________________


Q. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic

reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.

R. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity.

Settings shall be located on the sensor and shall be recessed to limit tampering.

S. In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass

is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor

is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.

T. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion

is being detected during both testing and normal operation.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

INSTALLATION:

A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location required

for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas

per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have hundred (100) percent coverage to

completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple

occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on

the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with

sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely

cover the respective room.

B. It is the contractor's responsibility to arrange a pre-installation meeting with manufacturer's

factory authorized representative, at owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and

installation criteria.

C. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible

installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or

interference of structural components. The contractor shall also provide, at the owner's facility,

the training necessary to familiarize the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment,

and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems.

FACTORY COMMISSIONING:

A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the

manufacturer's factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor

placement to ensure a trouble-free occupancy-based lighting control system. This service is

provided at an additional cost.

B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with ten

working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the

system fine tuning the factory authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the

owner's personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the sensors.


____________________________________________________________________________________


END OF SECTION


_____________________________________________________________________________

_INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1

SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1- GENERAL

Summary:

A. Includes But Not Limited To

1. Furnish and install lighting system as described in Contract Documents complete with lamps.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 26 06 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical

PART 2- PRODUCTS

Equipment:

A. Lighting Fixtures - See Fixture Schedule on Drawings.

1. Approved Manufacturers-

1) Columbia

2) Hubbell

3) Prescolite

4) Kim

5) Cree

6) Lithonia

B. Fluorescent Ballasts

2. Electronic solid state for 265mA, T5 lamps

a. UL listed and labeled.

b. Minimum power factor of 90 percent

c. Maximum total harmonic distortion of 20 percent.

d. Operation of lamps at normal light output and in compliance with Lamp Manufacturer’s

recommendations.

e. Audible noise level lower than quietest CBM certified ballast for same application.

f. Transient protection in accordance with ANSI 62.41-1984.

g. Comply with FCC Rules Part 18, 15J.

h. Maximum crest factor of 1.7.

i. Five year full replacement warranty including labor allowance for replacement.

j. Ballast voltage to match system voltage.

k. Fluorescent lamps shall be 3500K color temperature.

k. Approved Manufacturers -

1) Advance

2) Magnetek/Triad

3) Motorola

4) Osram Sylvania

C. Lamps

1. Approved Manufacturers -

a. Osram Sylvania

b. General Electric

c. North American Philips


_____________________________________________________________________________

_INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2

D. LED Light Fixtures

1. Minimum CRI rating of 90.

2. Minimum lumens per watt of 90.

3. LED’s to be 4000K color temperature.

PART 3- EXECUTION

Installation:

A. Interface with Other Work.

1. Coordinate with Sections 09100 and 09500 to obtain symmetrical arrangement of fixtures in

acoustic tile ceiling.

2. Coordinate with Section 09900 to ensure that light coves are properly painted before

installation of light fixtures.

B. Securely mount fixtures. Support fixtures weighing 50 lbs or more, especially those mounted in high

ceiling areas such as Cultural Center and Chapel, from building framing or structural members.

C. Fasten lay-in LED fixtures to ceiling suspension system on each side with bolts, screws, rivets, or

clips. In addition, connect lay-in fixtures weighing less than 50 lbs with two wire hangers minimum

to building framing or structural members. Connect wires to opposing corners of fixture and may be

slightly slack. Make final conduit connections to lay-in LED fixtures with specified flexible conduit

or flexible fixture whips.

D. Where fluorescent fixtures are shown installed end to end, provide suitable connectors or collars to

connect adjoining units to appear as a continuous unit.

E. Where recessed fixtures are to be installed, provide openings, plaster rings, etc, of exact dimensions

for such fixtures to be inserted in openings. Terminate circuits for recessed fixtures in an extension

outlet box near fixture and connect with specified flexible conduit. Where installed on canopies,

contractor must ensure recessed fixtures will fit within the canopy space.

F. Where pendant mounted light fixtures are to be installed, provide 5/8” threaded rods to support light

fixture, if adjustable air craft cable is not called out for on plans.

G. Contractor must clean light fixtures of dust, dirt, and debris accumulated during construction before

turning over building to owner. Replace lamps not working or broken during construction.

END OF SECTION

New Mexico State

University ICT-TNS

Division 27 - Communications Infrastructure Standards, 2016

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS

27 01 00 Operation and Maintenance of Communications Systems

27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications

27 05 13 Communications Services 27 05 14 Communications Cables Inside Buildings 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 27 05 28.29 Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems 27 05 28.33 Conduits and Back boxes for Communications Systems 27 05 28.36 Cable Trays for Communications Systems 27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems

27 06 00 Schedules for Communications 27 08 00 Commissioning of Communications

27 10 00 STRUCTURED CABLING

27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 27 11 16 Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures 27 11 19 Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels 27 11 20 Terminals and Connectors for Communications Conductors – Entrance Facility 27 11 23 Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack 27 11 26 Communications Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips

27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling

27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 27 13 13 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling 27 13 13.13 Communications Copper Cable Splicing and Terminations 27 13 23 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling 27 13 23.13 Communications Optical Fiber Splicing and Terminations 27 13 43 Communications Services Cabling

27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling

27 15 23 Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling 27 15 33 Communications Coaxial Horizontal Cabling 27 15 43 Communications Faceplates and Connectors

27 16 00 Communications Connecting Cords, Devices and Adapters

27 16 19 Communications Patch Cords, Station Cords, and Cross Connect Wire

27 20 00 DATA COMMUNICATIONS

27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment

27 30 00 VOICE COMMUNICATIONS

27 32 00 Voice Communications Telephone Sets, Facsimiles and Modems 27 32 13 Telephone Sets

27 32 23 Elevator Telephones 27 32 26 Ring-Down Emergency Telephones

27 40 00 AUDIO-VIDEO COMMUNICATIONS

27 41 00 Audio-Video Systems

Appendix A Approved parts list

Appendix B Typical ER, TR and Classroom Layouts

New Mexico State University Communications Cable Plant Division - 27

1

27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS

Scope

These guidelines identify and define the NMSU requirements and policies for designing and installing the Information Transport System (ITS) or telecommunications infrastructure and substructure at all NMSU facilities, the intent of this document is to provide a standard specification that will be used for all NMSU facilities requiring structured cabling installation. This document provides a list of approved components and systems comprising a complete structured cabling system that shall accommodate NMSU’s requirements in excess of ten years. Buildings are dynamic. Over the life of a building, or campus, both the telecommunications equipment and the cabling will change dramatically. The infrastructure for the Information Transport System (ITS) must be capable of handling these changes. The information transport system is more than just voice and data. It also encompasses many building systems including environmental controls, security, audio, television, sensing, alarms and paging. The information transport system includes all low voltage signal systems that convey information within or between buildings.

In order to have a building, or campus, successfully designed, constructed, and provisioned for telecommunications, it is imperative that the information transport system design be incorporated during the preliminary architectural design phase. To accomplish this, the architect must work closely with designated ICT staff via the NMSU F&S project manager.

Use of, and compliance with these guidelines is mandatory for NMSU personnel, and for architects, engineers, and installation contractors working on NMSU projects.

Design Guidelines

The NMSU Telecommunications Infrastructure Standards are based upon the code requirements and telecommunications industry standards contained in the following documents. These guidelines will not duplicate the information contained in those references, except where necessary to provide guidance, clarification or direction. It is imperative that NMSU personnel, architects, engineers, and installation contractors working on NMSU projects become familiar with these guidelines and the industry telecommunications standards referenced.

In instances where several technical alternatives may be available to provide a design solution, these guidelines will identify the preferred solution to meet NMSU needs. However, each facility and project is unique. Design for new construction will differ from design for retrofit of existing facilities. These guidelines will differentiate certain design approaches and solutions to be applied to new construction versus existing facilities, and different types of NMSU facilities. However, designers and installers shall always use sound engineering judgment in order to comply with the requirements of the codes and standards identified in this section. Design or installation questions shall be referred to ICT via NMSU F&S project manager for resolution.


2

Reference Standards

Adherence to, and compliance with, the codes and standards referenced, and the NMSU unique requirements and design solutions identified in the manual, is mandatory. Requests to deviate from the industry standards and design solutions prescribed in these guidelines may be submitted, on a case-by-case basis, in accordance with the instructions in the Policy and Procedures section of these guidelines. No deviation from the requirements of the National Electrical Code will be allowed.

Architects, Consultants and Contractors shall always reference the most recent standards available.

Codes, Standards, References, and Applicability

The cabling system described in this specification is derived in part from the recommendations made in the current editions of these industry standard documents. The list of documents below is incorporated by reference:

Reference Standards

1. Design, manufacture, test, and install data distribution systems per manufacturer’s requirements and in accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electric Code), state codes, local codes, requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and particularly the following specifications.

2. This Technical Specification and Associated Drawings. 3. TIA-526-7 (OFSTP-7)-2002+A1:2008, Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed

Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant. This standard specifies single-mode optical loss measurement methods between two passively connected points using an optical source and power meter.

4. TIA-526-14-B-2010 (OFSTP-14), Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant; IEC 61280-4-1 Edition 2, Fibre-Optic Communications Subsystem Test Procedure- Part 4-1: Installed Cable Plant- Multimode Attenuation Measurement. This standard is used to measure the optical loss between any two passively connected points, including end terminations, of a multimode optical fiber cable plant. – The optical fiber cable plant, as the term is used here, may consist of optical fiber cables, connectors, mounting panels, jumper cables, and other passive components, but it may not include active components. This standard includes an encircled flux launch condition metric for measuring cable plant. Additionally, this standard includes the description of using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) for total attenuation measurement and measurements of individual component loss.

5. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0–2009+A1:2010+A2:2012, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises. This standard specifies requirements for generic telecommunications cabling. It specifies requirements for cabling system structure, topologies and distances, installation, performance, and testing. The purpose of this standard is to enable the planning and installation of a structured cabling system for all types of customer premises. This standard specifies a system that will support generic telecommunications cabling in a multiproduct, multi-vendor environment.

6. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1–2009+A1:2012, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. This standard specifies requirements for telecommunications cabling within a commercial building and between commercial buildings in a campus environment. It


3

defines terms, specifies cabling topology, lists cabling requirements, establishes cabling distances, sets telecommunications outlet/connector configurations, and provides additional useful information. The purpose of this standard is to enable the planning and installation of a structured cabling system for commercial buildings. This standard establishes performance and technical criteria for various cabling system configurations for accessing and connecting their respective elements.

7. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2–2009+A1:2010, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard. This standard specifies minimum requirements for balanced twisted-pair telecommunications cabling (e.g., channels, permanent links) and components (e.g., cable, connectors, connecting hardware, patch cords, equipment cords, work area cords, jumpers) that are used up to and including the telecommunications outlet/connector and between buildings in a campus environment. This standard also specifies field test procedures and applicable laboratory reference measurement procedures for all transmission parameters.

8. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3–2009+A1:2011, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. 9. This standard is applicable to premises optical fiber cabling components. Specified in this

standard are requirements for components such as cable, connectors, connecting hardware, and patch cords. The purpose of this standard is to specify cable and component transmission performance requirements for premises optical fiber cabling.

10. ANSI/TIA-568-C.4–2011, Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components Standard. This standard is limited to coaxial cable and components related to the broadband transport industries.

11. ANSI/TIA-569-C–2012, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. This standard is limited to the telecommunications aspect of commercial building design and construction, encompassing telecommunications pathways and spaces. Telecommunications pathways are designed for installation of telecommunications media, and telecommunications spaces are the rooms and areas where media is terminated and telecommunications equipment is installed. Both single- and multi-tenant buildings are recognized by this standard.

12. Building Industries Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM).

13. AMP NetConnect - Design and Installation Contractor Agreement (now part of Commscope).

14. AMP NetConnect - Undercarpet Cabling Planning and Installation Manual (now part of Commscope).

15. Determine and adhere to the most recent edition of these specifications when developing

responses.

16. Specifications as provided by NMSU ICT, F&S and any other special codes that may apply.

17. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents; the contractor is responsible to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation.


4

27 01 00 Operation and Maintenance of Communications

Systems

1.01 POLICY AND PROCEDURES

Management of NMSU’s Campus Network is the responsibility of the Information and Communications Technology department (ICT). This includes network design, operations, performance monitoring, optimization, troubleshooting, and disaster recovery. The ICT staff is also responsible for the planning and development of operational and design standards for local area networks (LANs), wide area networks (WANs), voice communication systems, telecommunica tions infrastruc ture and Classroom Technology at all NMSU facilities . 2.01 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

NMSU requires that the telecommunications infrastructure and substructure be designed and installed in accordance with applicable codes and industry standards. Due to the unique physical characteristics of many NMSU facilities, some technical design solutions are better suited than others. These guidelines identify which design solutions are appropriate and approved for the various types of buildings.

3.01 PRELIMINARY ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN PHASE

NMSU requires that the telecommunications design be incorporated during the preliminary architectural design phase of new construction, renovations or remodeling. This will insure that the building(s) will be successfully designed, constructed, and provisioned for telecommunications.

4.01 ICT ROLE IN CAMPUS BUILDING PROJECTS

NMSU requires the architect and designers to work closely with the ICT designated staff as a team throughout the entire project life cycle, starting at the preliminary architectura l design phase.

5.01 NEW CONSTRUCTION

All new construction projects shall contain a telecommunications infrastructure designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of these guidelines.

6.01 RENOVATION TO EXISTING STRUCTURES All NMSU facilities undergoing renovation or remodeling shall incorporate a telecommunications infrastructure designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of these guidelines.

7.01 UPGRADING TELECOM INFRASTRUCTURE TO NEW STANDARDS

Every effort should be made to upgrade existing telecommunications infrastructure at any NMSU facility, during renovation, to meet the standards and specifications of these guidelines.

8.01 SHARING OF TELECOM INFRASTRUCTURE

NMSU requires dedicated telecommunications infrastructure. The sharing of spaces and


5

pathways is NOT allowed.

9.01 DESIGN PROCEDURES

In order to have a building successfully designed, constructed, and provisioned for telecommunications, it is imperative that the telecommunications design be incorporated during the preliminary architectural design phase. To accomplish this, the architect must work closely with the designated NMSU ICT staff.

10.01 APPROVAL FOR ALTERNATIVE DESIGN SOLUTIONS

This guideline identifies specific design solutions that are intended to meet the technical requirements of ICT. Requests to deviate from industry standards or ICT design solutions will be considered on a case-by-case basis. Any request to deviate from the requirements of the National Electrical Code will not be accepted.

Requests to apply alternative design solutions shall be submitted to ICT for consideration. Approval will only be granted in writing.

The request must include: A complete description of the proposed alternative design solution identifying: The type of facility; the conditions at the facility; the approved design solution contained in these guidelines and the relevant standards identified in section 27 01 00; the proposed alternative design; identify all standards referenced in these guidelines which the alternative design will not be in compliance with, and the effect of non-compliance, both short and long term; and the reason for wishing to use the alternative design.

11.01 PROCUREMENT AND INSTALLATION POLICY

In larger construction projects, the telecommunications infrastructure installation will be part of the general construction contract. A competitive acquisition should still be pursued with the contractors listed by ICT as approved contractors. The procurement and installation of the telecommunications infrastructure in large construction projects will be a combined effort between ICT and F&S staff.

12.01 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM WARRANTY AND CERTIFICATION.

NMSU requires a warranty on the installation of the Structured Cabling System of at least one year from building acceptance. In addition, NMSU requires that 100% of the cables and termination equipment installed be tested and certified at the designed and intended performance level.

13.01 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS NMSU’s cabling infrastructure requires an AMP NetConnect Systems structured cabling system. The cabling system shall be backed by a TE Connectivity 25-Year System Warranty. The system warranty shall be facilitated by the Contractor and be established between NMSU and TE Connectivity (Commscope).

The successful cabling contractor must meet the following three requirements;

1. Must be an AMP-authorized NETCONNECT Design & Installation Contractor (ND&I) and

maintain current status with the warranting manufacturer AMP, including all training requirements,

for the duration of the Cable Infrastructure Project. The contractor shall staff each installation crew

with the appropriate number of trained personnel, in accordance with their manufacturer/warranty


6

contract agreement, to support the TE CONNECTIVITY 25-Year System Performance Warranty

requirements. Prior to installing any cable on the site, the contractor must submit copies of the

training certificates for the installation crew to the NMSU Project Manager. After installation, the

Contractor shall submit all documentation to support the warranty in accordance with the

manufacturer’s warranty requirements, and to apply for said warranty on behalf of NMSU. The

system warranty will cover the components and labor associated with the repair/replacement of any

failed link as a result of a defectiv e prod uc t when a valid warranty claim is submitted within the

warranty period.

2. Must be a current member in good standing of the Corning Cable Systems' LANscape® Network of

Preferred Installers (NPI). Members of the selective Network of Preferred Installers are, subject to

the applicable contract terms, able to install products eligible for Corning Cable Systems’ warranty of

up to 25 years for LANscape Fiber Optic Cabling Solutions and up to 10 years for Intelligent Traffic

Systems (ITS) networks through the Corning Cable Systems LANscape Solutions Extended

WarrantySM Program (EWP). The warranty covers product components of the Corning Cable Systems

solution including fiber optic cables, hardware and connectivity, including pre-terminated

systems. Corning Cable Systems guarantees to repair or replace defective products free of charge

after installation. Prior to installing any cable on the site, the contractor must submit copies of the

training certificates for the installation crew to NMSU -ICT.

3. Must have a BICSI® certified RCDD review the drawings and meet with ICT and F&S to discuss

the project and to ensure that a structured cabling system is instal le d that provide s a compr eh en si v e

telecom m unic atio ns infrast r uctur e.

7

27 05 00 Common Work Results for

Communications Systems

27 05 13 Communications Services

ICT is tasked with designing, specifying, deploying and maintaining all devices related to networking and telephony on the NMSU campus.

This includes but is not limited to all fiber optic and copper cabling, connectors and terminating hardware, network devices such as switches, routers, and wireless access points.

ICT is also responsible for deploying VoIP and traditional telephone handsets as well as emergency phones.

ICT Classroom Technology is responsible for all classroom design, operation and A/V components.

All other communications systems such as fire alarms, card access and building automation systems are designed, specified, deployed and maintained by F&S.

All moves, adds and changes, to the NMSU communications system, will be done by ICT personnel.

27 05 14 COMMUNICATIONS CABLES INSIDE BUILDINGS

The maximum length of LAN copper horizontal distribution cable is 90 meters (295 ft) from the work station outlet to the TC patch panel, no exceptions. Where this length would be exceeded the designer will add additional TCs as required.

Telecommunications cabling is always installed in a home-run fashion with individual cables running from the work area all the way to the telecommunications closet. Splices in horizontal distribution cable(s) is not allowed.

Conduit sweeps which meet ANSI/TIA/EIA569-A, bend radius requirements shall be used for all telecommunications conduit. The bend radius of the sweeps must be a minimum of 10-times the internal conduit diameter. Bending conduit in the field using manual or mechanical methods is acceptable. Standard electrical elbows (LBs) shall not be used. This sweep radius is necessary to insure that the conduits can accept future fiber optic cables.

Each telecommunications outlet box shall have an individual conduit routing to the telecommunications closet, or to the pull box or pulling point, connecting to a major cable pathway routing to the telecommunications closet. Outlet boxes shall be located in serviceable space. Looping, or “daisy-chaining,” of conduits between outlet boxes is not allowed.

All conduit ends shall have plastic bushings installed before the cable is pulled into the conduit.

Conduits will not be run next to hot water lines, steam pipes, or other utilities that may present a safety hazard or cause a degradation of system performance.

Conduits entering the Telecommunications Closet should be designed and located allowing for the most flexibility in the routing and racking of cables.

Conduits or conduit sleeves entering through the floor of the Telecommunications Closet shall terminate four (4) inches above the finished floor.

All metallic telecommunications conduits entering the Telecommunications Closet, Equipment Room, or Entrance Facility shall be bonded together, and bonded to the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar

8

with a #6 AWG ground cable.

All in-use and spare conduits entering the Telecommunications Closet, Equipment Room, or Entrance Facility shall be sealed to prevent the intrusion of water, gasses, and rodents throughout the construction project.

All conduits and cables that penetrate fire rated walls or floors must be fire stopped.

All outside plant (OSP) conduits and inner-duct, used and spare, shall be plugged with watertight plugs at both ends to prevent the intrusion of water, gasses, and rodents throughout the construction project. All OSP conduits shall have pull lines rated at a minimum of 90 kg (200 lb) pulling tension installed. The pull lines must be re-pulled each time an additional cable is installed.

27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

A #6 AWG insulated stranded copper cable shall be provided from the ER to the building main electrical service ground electrode. A Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be installed in the ER. All equipment racks in the ER, and all exposed non-current carrying metal parts of telecommunications and information technology equipment in the ER must be bonded to the TMGB.

27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems

DESIGN CRITERIA FOR INSIDE PLANT CONDUIT

Telecommunications conduit must be properly designed and installed. The design and installation practices for telecommunications conduit have some unique requirements beyond those normally seen in standard electrical conduit. The following items are required to be included in the design and installation of interior telecommunica tions conduit:

Conduits must be designed and installed in the most direct route possible from the telecommunications closet to the work area.

27 05 28.29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS

Hangers and cable support mechanisms must be designed to easily accommodate current and future high- performance cabling upgrades, eliminating the need to replace infrastructures when more cable is added.

Products such as Caddy Cat Links or equivalent are designed for aerial cable support system. They provide a wide bend radius that reduces cables friction and offers less vertical cable compaction. These cable supports come in several sizes.

27 05 28.33 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS

Pull boxes used with telecommunications conduits in interior locations shall be rated NEMA-1. Pull boxes used in damp or wet locations such as plumbing chases or out of doors shall be rated NEMA-3R. Pull boxes shall be installed in conduits at an interval no greater than every 100 feet. A pull box shall be installed in conduit runs whenever there are two 90°sweeps, or a total of 180°of sweeps, in a conduit run. Any deviations

9

from these criteria must have prior approval from ICT.

27 05 28.36 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

The Inside Plant (ISP) telecommunications substructure are the cable pathways and support structures necessary for routing telecommunications cabling between telecommunications closets, and from the telecommunications closet to the work area. There are numerous different products and methods that can be employed to build the substructure. Some of these methods include: Enclosed conduit system, Open or enclosed cable trays, Routing above a false ceiling using cable supports, and in-slab floor ducts.

Cable tray shall be installed to allow 12 inches of open space above and to one side of the tray along the entire length. Cable tray shall not be installed within six inches from any source of EMI.

Actual dimensions of cable tray shall be determined by the volume of cable planned for the installation at time of construction and shall not be filled more than 50% of its capacity.

Cable tray shall only be installed in accessible ceiling spaces and not routed through offices, conference rooms restrooms, etc. Cable tray shall not have any obstructions (e.g. wall studs, pipes).

Specify appropriate manufacturer hardware materials to attach the cable tray to permanent building structure. Continuous support elements shall be bonded to the TMGB/TGB. Sections may be bolted together with ground jumpers, if the support structure is approved by the manufacturer as a grounding conductor.

The conduit system shall be routed inside ceilings, floors, and walls to the greatest extent possible. Surface mounted conduit shall be used only when there is no other route to provide service to the desired location.

For the main floor in, “slab on grade constructed buildings”, conduit will route in walls and ceilings not in or under the slab. If this design is not possible, an alternate must be presented and approved following the “Approval for Alternate Design Solutions” process detailed in section 27 01 00. If an under slab route solution is approved, the conduit must be installed with at least 1” of concrete encasement around all sides of the conduit. Exceptions occur in cases of modular furniture installation. In which in slab conduit routing is sometimes necessary; design should work in conjunction with modular furniture.

Telecommunications outlets shall be located to minimize the length of patch cord required to connect the computer or telephone to the outlet.

All outlets shall have a minimum one inch conduit. Increase the conduit size as necessary for the quantity of cables to be installed. Cable fill shall not exceed 40%.

All wall outlets shall be mounted in a minimum four (4)-inch by four (4)-inch by two and one-half (2 ½)-inch deep single gang outlet box. Double gang outlet boxes will be required when cable quantity is greater than six cables. An electrical outlet shall always be located within three (3) feet of a telecommunications wall mounted outlet.

Telecommunications cable and conduit shall maintain the minimum separation distance from power as listed below.

For power systems operating at 480V or greater, including electrical distribution panels, step down devices or

10

transformers, maintain a minimum separation distance of 6 m (20 ft) from all telecommunications cross- connects.

For power systems operating at 480V or greater, maintain a minimum separation distance of 3 m (10 ft) from all telecommunications cabling. Pathways should cross perpendicular to electrical power cables or conduits.

For large electrical motors or transformers, maintain a minimum separation distance of 1.2 m (4 ft) from all telecommunica tions cabling

For lightning protection system conductors (NEC 800-13), maintain a minimum separation distance of 1.8 m (6 ft) from all telecommunications cabling

For power systems operating at less than 480V, including all conduit and cables used for electrical power distribution, maintain a minimum separation distance of 0.6 m (2 ft) from all telecommunications cabling. Pathways should cross perpendicular to electrical power cables or conduits.

For fluorescent lighting, maintain a minimum separation distance of 12 cm (5 in) from all telecommunications cabling. Pathways should cross perpendicula r to fluorescent lighting.

For branch circuits (secondary) power (120/240V, 20A) where electric light or power circuits coexist with telecommunications cabling, maintain a minimum separation distance of 0.50 mm (2 in).

27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications

Systems

TELECOMMUNICATIONS SUBSTRUCTURE—OUTSIDE PLANT

The Outside Plant Substructure is the physical pathway used to distribute backbone cabling between buildings, and to bring the entrance cable from the nearest campus backbone access point across NMSU property to the Entrance Facility. Underground conduit is the standard method of distribution between buildings on campus. Input from ICT and F&S staff must be incorporated in developing the initial and on-going construction schedules. This input is especially important when an early or phased turn-up of buildings is required. Timing on the construction of the main telecommunications room and building, and the backbone cable plant connecting it to key buildings, would be a vital consideration in bringing key buildings online at required dates. In new construction, the outside plant substructure must be sized to accommodate all low voltage services planned for initial installation, plus a minimum of 50% growth capacity. All parties are required to call New Mexico One Call, 811, before digging. Questions about existing NMSU underground utilities should be directed to F&S Utilities at (575)646-7114.

UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION

Underground distribution of low voltage services on NMSU property will consist of appropriately sized conduits and telecommunications maintenance holes or handholes. Telecommunications and other low voltage services such as fire alarm, security systems, and CATV distribution shall not share the same underground distribution conduits.

UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

Direct burial of telecommunications cable is not acceptable, and will only be approved under unique circumstances on a case-by-case basis. Requests to direct bury cable must follow the “Approval for Alternative Design Solutions” process described in section 27 01 00. The major cost in placing underground

11

utilities is the labor for digging the trench. Therefore, underground telecommunications distribution to permanent facilities shall always be placed in conduit to facilitate the easy installation of additional future cables. Key requirements for underground conduit installation include:

OSP conduit quantity and size shall be determined based on the requirements for the initial installation of cable and a realistic prediction of future expansion in the area. Always provide a minimum of 50% spare capacity above the initial installation requirements and known growth.

OSP conduit quantities shall be based on a maximum of 40% cable fill per conduit.

All OSP telecommunications conduit installations shall have a minimum of one spare conduit.

ICT and F&S will specify the products to be used for OSP telecommunications conduits. Typically, these will consist of Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 Rigid Nonmetallic conduit, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), and must meet the requirements of NEMA TC 6. All conduit sections shall be glued with PVC pipe glue to form a watertight joint. All schedule 40 pipes to be embedded in sand. Spacers are required to maintain proper separation between multiple conduits in a run.

All OSP conduits shall be installed with a slight drain slope (0.125 inches-per-foot) away from buildings to prevent the accumulation of water in the conduit or ingress to the buildings.

Factory-manufactured sweeps which meet ANSI/TIA/EIA569-A, bend radius requirements shall be used for all telecommunications conduit. The bend radius of the sweeps must be a minimum of 10-times the internal conduit diameter. Standard electrical elbows shall not be used.

All campus distribution conduits must be buried a minimum of 30 inches below grade, with preferred depth of 36 inches.

All cable shall be installed in the lowest available conduit in a duct bank, working up as additional cables are installed.

All OSP conduits and innerduct, used and spare, shall be plugged with watertight plugs at both ends to prevent the intrusion of water, gasses, and rodents throughout the construction project. All OSP conduits shall have quarter (1/4)-inch polypropylene pull ropes installed. The pull ropes must be re-pulled each time an additional cable is installed.

In new construction and new conduit, fiber optic backbone cables shall always be installed in fiber optic innerduct. Normally, three to four innerducts can be placed in a four (4)-inch conduit. Where fiber optic cable is installed into existing conduits, the use of fiber optic innerduct is preferred if space is available. Innerduct is used to separate and segregate cables, and to prevent the tangling of cables in a conduit. Types of textile maxcell innerduct may be used.

Splices in backbone fiber optic cable are not allowed, design OSP conduit accordingly.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS MAINTENACE HOLE

Telecommunications maintenance holes shall be placed in outside plant conduit runs at an interval no greater than every 500 feet. Conduits routing between two telecommunications maintenance holes, or between a maintenance hole and a building, shall contain no more than two 90°sweeps or a total of 180°of sweeps. If additional conduit sweeps are required, place additional maintenance holes as needed.

12

Telecommunications maintenance holes are typically constructed in pre-fabricated cast concrete, and contain a floor section, wall section, and top section. Maintenance holes are sized based on the ultimate duct structure and equipment that will be located in the maintenance hole. Minimum size of any maintenance hole shall be 6’X8’X7’. Key requirements for telecommunica tions maintenance holes installa tion include :

Telecommunications maintenance hole; sections must be installed with a watertight joint sealer between the sections of the maintenance hole.

Telecommunications maintenance holes must be equipped with a pre-cast concrete floor section. Bare earth for the floor of a maintenance hole is not allowed. The floor section must contain a sump to facilitate the use of a submersible pump for de-watering the maintenance hole.

Telecommunications maintenance holes must be equipped with steel pulling eyes pre-cast in the walls opposite to each duct bank to facilitate able-pulling apparatus.

Telecommunications maintenance holes must contain 18 hole or 37-hole cable racks for dressing and securing cables that route through the maintenance hole. Must contain at least two sets per maintenance hole wall. Telecommunications maintenance holes over five (5) feet deep must have permanently installed ladders. All telecommunications maintenance holes shall have a minimum of one ground rod.

All metal hardware in the maintenance hole or handhole (racks and ladders) must be grounded to the bonding tabs pre-cast in the maintenance hole, with the bonding tabs bonded to the ground rod.

The cover of all telecommunications maintenance holes must be a minimum of one (1) inch above the finished grade after all landscaping is completed. If maintenance holes are located in paved areas, the pavement must be tapered up to the maintenance hole cover.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS HANDHOLE

A handhole is similar to a miniature maintenance hole that is used solely as a pulling point to expedite the installation of cable in conduit runs over 500 feet or with more than two 90°sweeps. Maximum size of handhole is 4X4X4. The following rules apply to the use of handholes:

A handhole shall not be used if the ultimate or total requirements exceed the capacity of eight four (4)-inch conduits, in and out.

Where more than eight four (4)-inch conduits are used in a duct bank, telecommunications maintenance hole must be used in lieu of handholes. A handhole lid must be marked “Communiations”. A handhole must have a Tier 15 rating or higher. If a handhole is located within 20 ft. of a paved surface it must have a Tier 22 rating.

A handhole may be utilized for splicing cables together. Conduit entering the handhole shall be aligned on opposite walls of the handhole at the same elevation.

27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems

13

To be consistent with ANSI/TIA/EIA standards and industry practices, it’s important that both labeling and color coding be applied to all telecommunications infrastructure components. Labeling with the unique identifier will identify a particular component. Proper color coding will quickly identify how that component is used in the overall telecommunications infrastructure of the facility.

Administration of the telecommunications infrastructure includes documentation of cables, termination hardware, patching and cross-connection facilities, conduits, other cable pathways, telecommunications closets, and other telecommunications spaces.

In order to create a consistent environment, ICT maintains a campus wide numbering scheme for voice and data outlets and patch panels.

Voice and data outlets shall use the following labeling sequence:

ER/TR/TC # (1000, 2000, 3000)

1000= ER/TR # 1xxx= Work Area Outlet jack number.

A label must be affixed to both the top and bottom label holder in the faceplate.

Example: 4 port single gang faceplate labels with four data cables.

Top label – 1001 1002 Bottom label – 1003 1004

When more than one patch panel is needed per ER/TR/TC, the numbering scheme shall continue with the next panel, port 1048, 1049.

Outlet numbers shall be labeled on each cable at the outlet and at the ER/TR/TC.

Labels are generally of either the adhesive or insert type. All labels must be legible, resistant to defacement, and maintain adhesion to the application surface.

Outside plant labels shall be totally waterproof, even when submerged.

All labels shall be machine printed.

Labels applied directly to a cable shall have a clear vinyl wrapping applied over the label and around the cable to permanently affix the label.

Other types of labels, such as tie-on labels, may be used. However, the label must be appropriate for the environment in which it is used, and must be used in the manner intended by the manufacturer.

Color Coding – Cable Termination Fields

Industry standard (ANSI/TIA/EIA 606) color coding shall be applied to all cable termination fields in Telecommunications Closets, Equipment Rooms, and Entrance Facilities. Color coding may also be used to

identify specific cables in a pathway, or the function of specific equipment racks or equipment. The same color is always applied to both ends of any given cable. Cross-connections are generally made between termination fields of different colors. The color may be applied to the plywood backboard behind the termination block, may be the color of a plastic cover on a termination block, or may be the actual color of the insert label on a termination block or patch panel. The following color code shall be used in all NMSU

14

facilities:

Orange – Reserved for identification of the telecommunication service demarcation point (demarc). Orange may only be used by the telephone company.

Green – Used to identify the termination of network connections on the customer (NMSU) side of the demarc.

Purple – Used to identify cables originating from common equipment, such as the telephone PBX, LAN hubs, or multiplexer.

White – Used to identify the first-level backbone telecommunications media termination in the building containing the main cross-connect. The main cross-connect is usually in the Equipment Room. In buildings that do not contain the main cross-connect, white may be used to identify the second-level backbone terminations.

Gray – Used to identify the second-level backbone telecommunications media termination in the building containing the main cross-connect.

Blue – Used to identify the termination of horizontal distribution cables routing from the Telecommunications Closet or Equipment Room to the Work-Area. A blue color coding is only required at the TC or ER end, not at the work-area end of the cable.

Brown – Used to identify inter-building backbone cable terminations.

Yellow – Used to identify termination of auxiliary circuits, alarms, maintenance, security, and other miscellaneous circuits.

DRAWINGS

Drawings are used to illustrate different stages of telecommunications infrastructure planning, installation, and administra tion.

Installation or Construction Drawings

Installation or construction drawings are the plans that show the installer how the infrastructure is to be installed. The quality of the installation can be directly impacted by the level of detail in the installation drawings and written specifications. Installation drawings for NMSU projects shall, at a minimum, show pathway locations and cable routing. Drawings shall indicate which telecom room cables should terminate in and the cable count in each telecom room. ICT will provide drawings showing the typical configuration of telecommunications spaces including backboard and equipment rack configurations. See Appendix B.

As-built Drawings The as-built drawings graphically document the installed telecommunications infrastructure through floor plan, elevation, and detail drawings. In many cases, these drawings will differ from the installation drawings because of changes made during construction and specific site conditions. In the as-built drawings, the identifiers for major infrastructure components must be recorded. The pathways, spaces, and cabling portions of the infrastructure each may have separate drawings if warranted by the complexity of the installation or the scale of the drawings. As-built drawings are a vital component of the telecommunications administration system, and must be kept current as adds, moves, and changes take place. ICT requires the installer to provide a complete and accurate set of as-built drawings.

27 06 00 Schedules for Communications

15

CRITICAL DELIVERABLES EXPECTED FROM TELECOMMUNICATIONS

CONTRACTOR . During construction the cabling contractor must contact ICT to inspect the work at the following milestones:

1. Prior to anchoring the telecom equipment racks to the floor to ensure they are positioned in the proper location.

2. While pulling horizontal cable from TR to wall outlet locations, when pathways are open and exposed. ICT representative must witness some portion of cabling installation.

3. During termination of the horizontal cabling in the TR on the patch panels, 10% of terminations must be witnessed by ICT representative. The TR and patch panels will be inspected again for proper labeling and workmanship at the end of the project.

4. During wall outlet terminations, 10% of cable termination must be witnessed by ICT representative during the project.

5. When testing and labeling faceplates, 10% of testing must be witnessed by ICT representative. Wall outlets must be tested with the faceplate installed in the outlet.

Typically a 2-3 day notice sent via email to: [email protected] will be sufficient to schedule the inspections. If the cabling portion of the project is small in nature, some or all of the inspections may performed at the same time.

It is essential for ICT to receive all test results and as-built drawings prior to job acceptance. The test results must adhere to the following specifications, formats and delivery conditions:

Specifications

Complete end-to-end test results for all copper UTP and fiber optic lines installed is required.

All fiber optic cable must be visually inspected upon delivery to the installation site.

During construction the cabling contractor must contact ICT to inspect the work at the following milestones:

1. Prior to mounting the fiber termination panel to ensure its located in the proper location. 2. While pulling fiber optic cable when pathways are open and exposed. ICT representative must

witness some portion of fiber installation. 3. During termination in the TR of the OSP fiber, 10% of terminations must be witnessed by ICT

representative during the project. TR and fiber termination panel will be inspected again for proper labeling and workmanship at the end of the project.

4. When testing and labeling fiber, 10% of testing must be witnessed by ICT representative.

Typically, a 2-to-3 day notice sent via email to: [email protected] will be sufficient to schedule the inspections. If the cabling portion of the project is small in nature, some or all of the inspections may performed at the same time.

End to end test measurements shall be provided for single-mode and multimode fibers (2 wave lengths per test is required). Test results must be submitted for review as part of the installation inspection requirements. Test results shall be in paper form and electronic form, and must contain the names and signatures of the technicians performing the tests.

Testing shall be performed on 100% of the fibers in the completed end-to-end system. 1. TIA-526-7 (OFSTP-7)-2002+A1:2008, Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber

Cable Plant. This standard specifies single-mode optical loss measurement methods between two

mailto:[email protected]

16

passively connected points using an optical source and power meter. 2. TIA-526-14-B-2010 (OFSTP-14), Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant;

IEC 61280-4-1 Edition 2, Fibre-Optic Communications Subsystem Test Procedure- Part 4-1: Installed Cable Plant- Multimode Attenuation Measurement. This standard is used to measure the optical loss between any two passively connected points, including end terminations, of a multimode optical fiber cable plant. – The optical fiber cable plant, as the term is used here, may consist of optical fiber cables, connectors, mounting panels, jumper cables, and other passive components, but it may not include active components. This standard includes an encircled flux launch condition metric for measuring cable plant. Additionally, this standard includes the description of using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) for total attenuation measurement and measurements of individual component loss. Additionally, all fiber optic cable links must pass all installation and performance tests both recommended and mandated by the cable manufacturer.

100% of all pairs in backbone copper cables shall be tested for continuity and wire-map on the finished installation.

The transmission performance of a cabling system depends upon the characteristics of the horizontal cable, connecting hardware, patch cords, equipment cords, work area cords, cross-connect wiring, the total number of connections, and the care with which they are installed and maintained. The development of high-speed applications requires that cabling systems be characterized by transmission parameters such as insertion loss, PSNEXT loss, return loss, and PSELFEXT. System designers use these performance criteria to develop applications that utilize all four pairs in a cabling system for simultaneous bi-directional transmission. This Standard provides minimum cabling component performance criteria as well as procedures for component and cabling performance validation. Wall outlet terminations on the horizontal cabling must be complete and the faceplate attached to the wall prior to final testing.

Format

Test Results must be submitted in 2 formats. First, must be original file(s) down loaded from tester. Secondly as a .pdf file.

As Built drawings must be submitted with .dwg file extensions.

Delivery

Test Results may be electronically submitted to ICT Telecommunications. Contact information will be provided after contract is awarded and before project completion.

27 08 00 Commissioning of Communications

SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING:

The Commissioning Process includes Systems Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test

systems functional performance under normal operating conditions. Upon completion of the network

equipment installation, ICT network services technicians and engineers will perform system tests on

the entire Information Transport Systems (ITS) to test system performance. Any evidence or cause for

concern that the structured cabling system is not performing as designed will be brought to the installation

contractors attention and a resolution determined before the system is accepted. The Contractor shall

provide any required labor, materials, and test equipment identified in the testing process to confirm the

structured cabling system is functioning properly. The Contractor shall provide machine generated

cable test reports on 100% of installed cabling, both copper and fiber.

17

27 10 00 Structured Cabling

Deviation from listed specifications or manufacturers must be pre-approved by ICT as per section 27

01 00.

Not all of the following items will be applicable to all projects. Prior to order contractor must submit,

for approval from ICT, a complete list of materials for the project.

Other items may be required for specific contract; if item is not an approved manufacturer it must be

pre-approved by ICT.

27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings

MAIN TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM (ER)

The Main Telecommunications Equipment Room (ER) is the central location in a building where the major telecommunications equipment is located. The ER typically contains the telephone demark, Distribution Layer data equipment and LAN switching equipment, the CATV “head end” distribution equipment, closed circuit TV and security systems, card access controllers and additional low voltage systems. To minimize both conduit and cable lengths, the ER shall be located as close as practical to the center of the building. ER shall be a minimum of 10’ by 10’. In new construction, the ER shall be sized and provisioned to contain all major voice, data, and video equipment required to support the building, and all other computer based and networked low voltage systems. During renovation or remodeling of existing facilities, every reasonable effort shall be made to co-locate these systems in a common equipment room.

ER PLANNING, LAYOUT, AND SIZING

The first step in determining the size required for the ER is to identify the systems that will be installed into the ER. In this process, first identify the size of the area that will be served from the ER. Next, identify the quantity, size and variety of systems to be installed to support the area, and the space required for each of the systems. Once the size and quantity of systems are identified, they shall be laid out in a functionally efficient arrangement. Some equipment, such as voice cross connects, LAN switches and patch panels will require

regular access and shall be located where they are easily accessible. ICT staff must be involved in the

design phase and must approve the final space requirements and design layout for all equipment and racks as well as conduit paths in ER. When laying out the arrangement of the ER, the following requirements and issues shall be addressed:

Groups of like equipment types shall be located together; i.e., voice, data for both LAN and video.

Wall space and equipment rack space must be designated for particular uses by particular people. Set aside specific backboard space and equipment rack space for the service providers demarc, and any associated equipment. Designate specific adjacent areas for each of the various service providers. Keeping all of the service providers on a common wall and row of equipment racks will limit their access to other areas of the equipment room.

Separate wall and equipment rack space is designated for the termination and cross connection of campus distribution cables, both copper and fiber optic. These areas shall be located adjacent to the equipment providing the services, such as the PBX, routers, and switches.

Careful design planning must be performed to ensure that all telecommunications cabling has the minimum setback distanced from all potential sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency

18

interference (RFI), such as electric motors, power transformers, etc. Incorrect planning can result in expensive changes at a later date.

Equipment racks and rack mounted equipment must have a minimum of three (3) feet of unrestricted clearance in front and back for technician access. In smaller installations, wall mounted swing-out equipment racks can be used to save space, but must have three (3)-feet clearance to the front and side of the rack. Note that some LAN equipment may be large, or may require clearance at both the front and back, and wall mounted swing-out racks may not be appropriate.

Once an acceptable equipment layout is developed, the size of the equipment room can be calculated. Always provide a minimum of 25% spare space for future growth. With the size determined, the location of the equipment room can be selected.

EQUIPMENT ROOM CHARACTERISTICS

The characteristics of the ER have a significant impact on all other aspects of telecommunications design. Next to insuring adequate size, selecting a suitable location is the most critical step in planning the ER. The major factors that must be considered when planning and locating the ER are:

Access for delivery and installation of large equipment into the ER.

Access by ICT and F&S personnel.

Restrictions on unauthorized access.

Close proximity to electrical service.

The ER must be dedicated to the telecommunications and information technology function. Shared use of boiler rooms, washrooms, janitor closets, electrical closets, or storage rooms is not allowed.

The floor, walls, and ceiling shall be sealed to reduce dust. Finishes shall be light in color to enhance room lighting. Flooring materials having antistatic properties shall be selected.

The room must be free of plumbing and electrical utilities not directly required to support the telecommunica tions functions.

Close proximity to service entrances for telecommunications and power.

Close proximity and centralized to the campus telecommunications distribution pathways (conduits and/or aerial distribution) to minimize the backbone cable lengths.

No pass thru to other rooms.

EQUIPMENT ROOM LOCATIONS

Unacceptable Room Locations : Any areas subject to water or steam infiltration, particularly basements. A floor drain is required if there is any risk of water entering the ER. Any areas exposed to excessive heat or direct sunlight. Any areas exposed to corrosive atmospheric or environmental conditions. Near or adjacent to any potential sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference (RFI) such as large electric motors, power transformers, arc welding equipment, or high power radio transmitting antennas.

This is a critical consideration, as EMI and RFI can render IT networks totally inoperable. No point within the ER shall be closer than 6 M (20 ft.) to power panels or equipment rated at greater than or equal to 480 V that may cause Electrical Interference or equipment which may cause RFI or EMI.

19

ENVIRONMENTAL PROVISIONING

The following environmental provisions are required in the Main Telecommunications Equipment Room:

Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) shall be provided on a 24 hours-per-day, 365 days-per-year basis. If the building system cannot assure continuous operation, a stand-alone unit shall be provided for the ER.

The temperature and humidity shall be controlled to provide a continuous operating range of 64°F to 75°F, with 30% to 55% relative humidity.

Lighting shall be a minimum of 50 foot candles, measured three (3) feet above the finished floor in the middle of all aisles between equipment racks and cabinets.

Minimum clear height in the ER shall be eight (9) feet without obstructions.

Dry chemical fire suppression systems may be used in the ER.

ELECTRICAL PROVISIONING

The following electrical provisions are required for the Main Telecommunications Equipment Room (ER):

Each room shall have a minimum of three (3) dedicated 120V-20AMP quad outlets installed on seprate walls , 18 inches above finished floor. It would be preferred these outlets be separated between two or more load centers. One (1) duplex 120V-15AMP convienince outlet shall be installed near the room entrance.

Some IT equipment, such as large LAN switches and routers, are ordered with dual power supplies. The placement of equipment with dual power supplies shall be identified and the appropriate racks must have two, separate, dedicated 20-amp 110VAC electrical circuits from the ER Technical Power panel, each terminated in separate quad (4-plex) outlets, and be appropriately marked to identify the separate circuit breakers.

Some major pieces of telecommunications equipment, such as UPS, may require 208 or 220 VAC power. These systems must be identified, and power requirements determined, well in advance of the ER architectural and electrical design.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS BACKBOARDS

All walls of the ER shall be covered with three-quarter inch A-C grade fire retardant plywood or painted with two coats of light colored, non-conductive fire retardant paint on all sides. The plywood shall extend from the floor to eight (8) feet above the finished floor, and shall be mounted with the “A” side exposed. Cutouts shall be provided around existing power and telecommunications outlets. In new construction, power and telecommunications outlets, and light switches in the ER shall be surface mounted on the plywood backboard.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLOSETS (TC)

The Telecommunications Closet(s) are located in each building, or each floor of a building, where backbone cables transition to horizontal distribution cables. These cables will be both fiber optic and copper, and will support voice, data, video, and other low voltage systems. The TC may also contain certain items of network electronics equipment such as routers or switching equipment. A large building, with large floors, may have multiple TCs on a floor. To minimize both conduit and cable lengths, the TC shall be located as close as practical to the center of the building where it is housed on each floor of the area to be served. TCs should be

20

“stacked” one above the other for multiple floors. Close attention must be given to the maximum length (90m) on LAN copper horizontal distribution cable.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLOSET PLANNING, LAYOUT, AND SIZING

ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A provides sizing formula for a TC in normal office buildings. The sizing is based on the “usable floor space,” which is the space on a floor that can actually be used for office activities. TC shall be a minimum of 60 square feet. Spaces such as mechanical rooms, janitorial closets, and rest rooms cannot be used for office activities, and are not counted as usable floor space. The sizing formula assumes an average of 100 square feet of floor space for each person, or “work –area.” Many NMSU buildings are not traditional commercial or office buildings, and the sizing guidelines of ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A must be adjusted to accommodate these buildings.

There shall be a minimum of one TC per building (may be ER). Additional TCs shall be added when the area to be served exceeds 10,000 square feet, or the cable length from the TC patch panel to the farthest work area outlet exceeds 90meters (295 feet). Cable length is not calculated on a straight-line distance. The distance must include the rises, drops, and bends that the cable will follow from the TC to the work area.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLOSET LOCATION

The TC in each building is the transition point between backbone cabling and horizontal distribution cabling. The TC must be able to contain telecommunications equipment, cable terminations, and associated cable interconnec tion apparatus.

The TC shall be dedicated to the telecommunications function.

The TC shall not be shared with electrical installations other than those necessary for telecommunications.

The TC shall be located as close as practical to the center of the area to be served, preferably in the core area of the building, to minimize the cable length. The maximum length of copper horizontal distribution cable is 90 meters (295 ft.) from the work station outlet to the TC patch panel, no exceptions. Where this length would be exceeded the designer will add additional TCs as required.

Multiple TCs on a floor shall be interconnected by a minimum of two (2) conduits. Additional conduits shall be installed as necessary based on the quantity of services supported.

All fiber optic backbone cables shall home-run from each individual TC to the main telecommunications Equipment Room, which should be the location of the data switching equipment. Requests for exceptions to this policy must follow the process described in section 27 01 00.

TCs shall not be located in or adjacent to areas containing sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference (RFI) such as large electric motors, power transformers, arc welding equipment, radio transmitting antennas, etc. This is a critical consideration, as EMI and RFI can render IT LAN networks totally inoperable.

No point within the TC shall be closer than 6 M (20 ft.) to power panels or equipment rated at greater than or equal to 480 V, that may cause electrical interference or equipment which may cause RFI or EMI.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLOSET SIZING AND LOCATION IN EXISTING FACILITIES.

Existing facilities present a unique challenge for sizing and locating the TC. Many buildings were designed and constructed only to support telephones. When planning the size and location of TCs in existing buildings, every reasonable effort shall be made to meet the requirements for telecommunications closets identified

21

above. In certain instances, the only viable alternative will be the use of one or several telecommunications cabinets in lieu of closets.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINETS FOR SMALL BUILDINGS WITH LIMITED SERVICES

Certain small buildings may not justify a separate room as the telecommunications closet. In existing buildings, sufficient space may not be available for a telecommunications closet. In such cases ICT will determine the best possible solution for serving the building and allowing room for future growth. These telecommunica tions spaces must provide :

Physical security to protect the contents and prevent unauthorized access. The space shall be accessible, but also provide physical security.

All power and telecommunications cables for equipment should be routed in a manner so that no cables are exposed.

All power and telecommunications cables routed to or from the space must be contained in conduit, surface mounted raceway, or routed within the adjacent wall.

The space must contain a plywood backboard for mounting telecommunications hardware.

The space must provide a means of mounting electronics equipment, including a LAN switch. Acceptable means are rails for rack mounting, or adequate space on the plywood backboard for electronics equipment wall mounting brackets.

The space must have a minimum of one 120V-20-AMP 120 quad (4-plex) electrical outlet on a dedicated circuit breaker from the electrical panel. An available general purpose power panel may be used to support the telecommunications cabinet power outlet. The power panel shall not be used to supply power to sources of electromagnetic interference such as large electric motors, arc welding, or industrial equipment.

There shall be at least one 15-amp 110VAC general purpose convenience outlet located within 6 feet of the space. The general purpose outlet shall not be used to power electronics equipment.

The backboard must have a telecommunications grounding busbar installed in accordance with the requirements listed in these guidelines.

The space shall not be located in or adjacent to areas containing sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference (RFI) such as large electric motors, power transformers, arc welding equipment, radio transmitting antennas, etc. This is a critical consideration, as EMI and RFI can render IT WAN and LAN networks totally inoperable.

Standard EIA 19-inch open frame equipment racks as approved for use in the Main Telecommunications Equipment Room may be used in the TC (Please see appendix I Equipment Specifications for rack and components.). Floor standing racks must be securely bolted to the floor, and must be braced to the wall with cable ladder racking. Multiple racks in the same TC shall be interconnected with vertical cable managers.

Some IT equipment, such as large LAN switches, require an equipment rack with both front and rear mounting rails. Where space or equipment is limited, an open frame wall mounted equipment rack or enclosed equipment cabinet may be used. Wall mounted racks and cabinets must have two “swing-gates”: one for the front access panel and a second for rear access. Provide 36” clear work space front, rear, and at one end of each equipment rack / cabinet line-up for floor mounted racks / cabinets leaving sufficient front and rear rack / cabinet footprints for any equipment planned for installation. All cabinets must have a minimum of 20” from the front rail to the wall; racks must have a minimum of 20” from the front rail to the rear isle

22

workspace. All racks must be equipped with an appropriate number and type or horizontal and vertical wire management modules both front and rear with strain relief brackets to insure proper bend radius and that strain relief is maintained for all cables.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROVISIONING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLOSETS

Walls and ceiling shall be treated and sealed to eliminate dust. Finishes shall be light in color to enhance room lighting. The floors in all low voltage equipment rooms will be; light colored, fire retardant, slip resistant, and provide protection from electrostatic discharge (ESD). In TCs that contain active electronics equipment (routers, switches, etc.), an HVAC system shall be provided on a 24 hours-per-day, 365 days-per-year basis. If the building system cannot assure continuous operation, a stand-alone unit shall be provided for the TC. The temperature and humidity shall be controlled to provide a continuous operating range of 64°F to 75°F, with 30% to 55% relative humidity. Lighting shall be a minimum of 50-foot candles measures 3 feet above the finished floor in the middle of all aisles between equipment racks and cabinets. Minimum clear height in the TC shall be 9 feet without obstructions. Fire suppression sprinklers shall be equipped with wire cages under the sprinkler heads to prevent accidental discharge. Drainage troughs shall be placed under the sprinkler pipes to prevent leakage onto the equipment within the room.

ELECTRICAL PROVISIONING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLOSETS

Each TC shall be equipped with a minimum of three 120V-20AMP quad (4-plex) electrical outlets, each on its own dedicated circuit breaker.

Some IT equipment, such as large LAN switches and routers, are ordered with dual power supplies. The placement of equipment with dual power supplies shall be identified and the appropriate racks must have three, separate, dedicated 20-amp 110VAC electrical circuits from the ER Technical Power panel, each terminated in separate quad (4-plex) outlets, and be appropriately marked to identify the separate circuit breakers.

The TC shall have 15-amp 112V duplex convenience outlets placed near the room entrance.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS BACKBOARDS

All walls of the TC shall be covered with three-quarter inch A-C grade fire retardant plywood or painted with two coats light colored, non-conductive fire retardant paint on all sides. The plywood shall extend from the floor to eight (8) feet above the finished floor, and shall be mounted with the “A” side exposed. Cutouts shall be provided around any existing power and telecommunications outlets. In new construction, power and telecommunications outlets, and light switches in the TC should be surface mounted on the plywood backboard.

CABLE SERVICE LOOPS

Horizontal distribution cables shall be installed with a service loop at one or both ends. The service loop shall have at least 10 feet of slack cable. Care must be exercised so that the service loop does not add excessive length to a cable run beyond the 295-foot distance limitation for horizontal distribution cable, or exceed the bending radius of the cable. The service loop shall be located in the most efficient location for future service depending on the type of cable raceway used. The necessary slack provided by a service loop can be achieved in several aesthetically pleasing methods, including but not limited to:

Routing cables the long way around a backboard or equipment rack.

Placing a service loop in the pull box of a closed conduit system.

23

Placing the service loop above the false ceiling before dropping down to the outlet location.

27 11 16 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABINETS

Planning of the ER layout must make allowances for proprietary equipment and racks, and allow expansion room for future equipment. ICT has standardized on a general purpose open frame 19-inch wide EIA standard equipment rack with 45RU. (Please see appendix I Equipment Specifications for rack and components.). Floor standing equipment racks must always be securely bolted to the floor. Some IT equipment, such as large LAN switches, may require an equipment rack with both front and rear mounting rails. Provide 36” clear work space front, rear, and at one end of each equipment rack for floor mounted racks leaving sufficient front and rear rack footprints for any equipment planned for installation. All racks must have a minimum of 20” from the front rail to the rear isle workspace. In cases of multiple rack installations all fiber optic terminations must be housed in left rack and all UTP terminations housed in right rack. Collaborations between architects, consultants, contractors and ICT is necessary in planning and placement of all ER/ TC equipment and components.

Where space or equipment is limited, an open frame wall mounted equipment rack or enclosed equipment cabinet may be used. Wall mounted racks and cabinets must have two “swing-gates”: one for the front access panel and a second for rear access. Provide 36” clear work space front, rear, and at one end of each equipment rack / cabinet line-up for floor mounted racks / cabinets leaving sufficient front and rear rack / cabinet footprints for any equipment planned for installation. All cabinets must have a minimum of 20” from the front rail to the wall; racks must have a minimum of 20” from front rail to the rear isle workspace.

27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling

27 13 13 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling

All inter-building OSP Voice (telephone) backbone cable between buildings will be provided by the contractor or ICT.

All intra-building voice backbone cable will consist of 24 AWG, 25, 50 or 100-pair UTP, UL/NEC CMR rated with a gray PVC jacket or CMP if required. Cable shall be third party verified to comply with TIA Category 3 requirements. A coupled bonding conductor will be installed within the riser bundle and bonded and grounded at each end. Voice backbone cabling must provide cabling to extend each single or business line circuit to any communications wall outlet.

27 13 13.13 Communications Copper Cable Splicing and Terminations

No splices are allowed on any communications cables.

27 13 23 Communications Fiber Backbone Cabling

All intra-building data backbone cabling will consist of one or more of the following types of cable;

24 strand single-mode fiber, 25-pair Category 3, Category 6 UTP or Category 6A UTP as specified by ICT

24

ICT’s goal is to prepare facilities for migration of networks to 10/40/100 Gigabit and higher backbone speeds. Fiber optic cable will be required to support 1/40/100 Gigabit and higher applications in the longer distances encountered in NMSU networks. Note that cable distances listed in this section refer to the terminated cable length from the patch panel in each TC to the patch panel in the main ER. Specific NMSU requirements for fiber optic backbones are:

All fiber optic backbone cables shall home-run either through conduit, utilize an interlocking armor outer jacket or inner duct, from each individual TC to the Main Telecommunications Equipment Room (ER), which houses the data switching equipment.

The standard inter-building fiber optic backbone shall be to install single-mode fiber optic cable to all buildings. All OSP fiber optic cable with loose tube construction installed underground shall be gel filled or be constructed of appropriate waterproofing compounds.

The standard cable size for inter-building fiber optic backbones is 48-strands of single-mode fiber optic cable. Strand count may be increased for specific buildings as required. ICT will determine the strand count during the design phase. All fiber optic backbones shall have capacity for all systems planned for use on the backbone.

All newly installed fiber optic cable shall be placed inside fiber optic innerduct. Where space is limited in existing conduit systems innerduct may be omitted. Innerduct shall be used to segregate and identify fiber optic cables in all locations where fiber optic cable is exposed.

Fiber optic cables shall have a minimum 20-foot service loop at the terminating ends and all approved splice points.

All strands of a fiber optic cable must be terminated with connectors and tested per previously sited standards.

ICT must design the interfaces on the network equipment based on the actual lengths of the backbone cable runs between the telecommunications closets. ICT must be given the estimated cable length between the fiber patch panels of each TC and the main ER fiber patch panel in the design phase, and the actual cable length as soon as possible in the construction and installation phase.

There shall be no splices in fiber optic cable unless specifically allowed by ICT. All splices approved by ICT must be fusion splices, and there shall never be more than one splice per cable run between the ER and TC.

27 13 23.13 Communications Optical Fiber Splicing and Terminations

ICT recognizes Corning Cables Systems LANscape solution cables, connectors and hardware as our preferred fiber optic cabling system. Any other fiber optic cable or component must be approved by ICT before use. All fiber optic cable splicing must be performed by trained technicians using approved parts and procedures as described by Corning Cable Systems SRP’s (standard recommended procedures). ICT requires all single-mode fiber be terminated using SC type connectors. Legacy multimode cables may be terminated on ST type connectors.

27 13 43 Communications Services Cabling

Other backbone cable installations, consideration shall be given to migrating other low voltage systems such as CATV, CCTV, fire alarm systems, EMS, emergency call boxes and facility control and monitoring systems to the common structured cabling system.

25

27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling

In all cases the NMSU requires cable installed in the horizontal distribution cabling (HDC) environment to support low voltage systems including voice and data, and shall be rated to match the environment it is being installed, either CMP or CMR. Horizontal distribution cable is the cable that routes from the telecommunications closet to the work-area. The standard configuration for ICT is to route a minimum of two (2) - 4 pair Category 6 UTP cables to each work area outlet. In all new installations, Category 6 UTP cable shall be used for both voice and data. Where additions are made to existing buildings, Category 6 UTP cable may be used for voice and data. Splitting cable pairs from one cable to two or more outlets to avoid adding an additional four (4)-pair cable is not allowed—no exceptions. The addition of spare work area outlets at any given work area, or the addition of spare Information Outlet locations on several walls of a room, is encouraged within the limitations of the project budget.

All horizontal distribution copper cable and components for LAN use at new or refurbished NMSU buildings, and NMSU-owned facilities, must be rated and installed to support Category 6 standard. Use of Augmented Category 6A cable is allowed.

All horizontal cabling will consist of AMP NetConnect cable, patch panels and connectors as listed in the approved parts appendix A.

27 15 23 Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling

NMSU does not currently use fiber optic cable for horizontal installations. This can be used if the project requires.

27 15 33 Communications Coaxial Horizontal Cabling

ICT does design, specify, deploy and maintain CATV coax cabling.

Coax cabling will only be added to project scope when requested.

27 15 43 Communications Faceplate and Connectors

Standard faceplates are AMP NetConnect SL Series faceplates and inserts or 110Connect single and double gang faceplates –either type is acceptable - standard color is almond. Communications outlets are typically within 3 feet of an electrical outlet and installed at the same height, unless otherwise specified. Communications outlets should be placed so that the work area or workstation cable does not exceed 5 meters (16 ft) in length. This length is figured into the total horizontal cabling length and must not be exceeded.

All modular jacks shall be un-keyed, unshielded, 4-pair, RJ-45, and shall fit in a .790" X .582" opening. Modular jacks shall terminate using 110-style pc board connectors, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each modular jack shall be wired to T568B. The 110-style insulation displacement connectors shall be capable of terminating 22-24 AWG solid or 24 AWG stranded conductors. The insulation displacement contacts shall be paired with additional space between pairs to improve crosstalk performance. Modular jacks

26

shall utilize a secondary PC board separate from the signal path for crosstalk compensation. Each modular jack shall meet the Category 6 or 6A performance standards and the requirements. The jack color will be orange unless otherwise specified.

Modular jacks shall be compatible with the AMP NetConnect SL Series Modular Jack Termination Tool part number 1725150-1. Each modular jack shall be provided with a bend-limiting strain relief. The strain relief shall provide cylindrical support to limit the bend radius at the point of termination. Modular jacks shall be UL Listed under file number E81956. See approved parts list at end of document.

27 16 00 Communications Connecting Cords, Devices, and Adapters

27 16 19 Patch Cords, Station Cords and cross connect wire

Cross-connects in the TR will be done by using patch cords to connect a jack on the horizontal cabling system Category 6 or 6A patch panel to the appropriate service connector or electronics. ICT will install all data equipment cables and patch cords used in the TR for data connectivity and install them as well as the network equipment. The cost for the patch cables will be included in the total cost for all IT equipment specified by ICT.

Voice cross-connects for dial tone will be made using standard cross connect wire. All voice system cross-connects will be done by ICT.

Because UTP cable is protected from cross talk and immunity from EMI through the cables pair twist and lay configuration, care must be taken to maintain the minimum bend radius (4 times the cable diameter) of the copper patch cords. All patch cords must be certified by the manufacturer to match the cable type used in the horizontal distribution.

Field terminated patch cords are not acceptable. Patch cables shall always be made from stranded copper wire to withstand the flexing associated with patch cords. Any existing field assembled patch cords shall

be replaced with factory assembled Category 6 or 6A patch cords. Do not attempt to use Category 5 patch cords for Category 6 or 6A connections.

27 20 00 Data Communications

27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment

ICT will specify and install all network equipment necessary for data communications. Budgetary estimate for network equipment and hardware will be determined during the design phase.

27 30 00 Voice Communications

27 32 13 Telephone sets

ICT will work with building owner to specify and install all telephone equipment necessary for voice

communications. Budgetary estimate for telephone equipment and hardware will be determined during

the design phase. If this equipment is to be ordered through the contract it must be pre-approved by ICT

Telecommunications Services.

27

27 32 23 Elevator Telephones

Contact ICT for information on elevator phones.

27 32 26 Ring-Down Emergency Telephones

Contact ICT for information on emergency phones.

27 40 00 Audio-Visual Communications

ICT Classroom Technology will work with architects, contractors, end-users and F&S personnel to

assist in the design of boardrooms, classrooms, theaters, auditoriums, conference rooms and shall be

consulted during all phases of design and construction.

To facilitate the provisioning of audio/video systems Classroom Technology shall be provided

preliminary floor plans for all projects. Plans will be marked to show services locations and space

requirements to be included in the construction documents.

A/V Room Provisioning

Dimmable fluorescent lights shall be equipped with 3-way switch located at console location (this

prevents screen washout).

If zone lighting is used divide into three zones: main classroom, whiteboard/projection screen, and

podium.

Install quad 110VAC outlets at console and projector area.

Install duplex 110VAC outlet at front and rear of room.

HVAC diffusers should not blow on projections screens.

Room lighting fixtures shall not block projector image.

Windows should not allow outdoor light to washout screen images. If windows are installed in rooms

provide window shades. Window shade control switches shall be placed next to console/podium.

Room acoustics shall be NC 30 or less. Walls should have a minimum sound transmission class of

STC 50. The walls of large classrooms and lecture halls should have an acoustically absorbent finish.

Rooms designated as “Web-Casting” rooms will have additional cabling required for ceiling MICs,

cameras and Vaddio sensors.

Console/Podium low-voltage work area outlets will require double gang boxes.

Ceiling projector mounts will be provided by contractor and installation location will be coordinated

with Classroom Technology personnel.

Projections screens will be motorized and sized for each room. Screens will not extend below 4 ft.

above finished floor to maintain proper viewing angles.

Typical room provision and layout can be seen in Appendix B drawing.

28

Appendix A - Approved parts list

The following table lists the most commonly used components of the AMP NetConnect Category 6 & 6A copper horizontal cabling system, CORNING Cable Systems LANscape fiber backbone system and Chatsworth Products ladder rack, racks, cable mangers and grounding components. These systems contain too many parts to list them all in this document. Consult the manufacturer’s web sites for the most current item descriptions and part numbers. Any substitutions must be approved by ICT.

ATTENTION ELECTRICIANS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND FURNITURE CONTRACTORS

Modula r furniture , tombstones, poke-throughs and in-floor boxes will require careful consideration when purchasing these items. Not all bezels are compatible with AMP NetConnect modular jacks. Do not install incompatible fixtures where telecommunica tions outlets are required. AMP NetConnect

620 Series, Category 6 UTP Cable, CMR, Blue TE620P-BLRB 620 Series, Category 6 UTP Cable, CMR, White TE620P-WTRB 620 Series, Category 6 UTP Cable, CMP, Blue TE620R-BLRB 620 Series, Category 6 UTP Cable, CMP, White TE620R-WTR B 640 Series, Category 6A U/UTP Twisted Pair Cable, CMR, Blue TE640P-BL02 640 Series, Category 6A U/UTP Twisted Pair Cable, CMR, White TE640P-WT02 640 Series, Category 6A U/UTP Twisted Pair Cable, CMP, Blue TE640R-BL02 640 Series, Category 6A U/UTP Twisted Pair Cable, CMP, White TE640R-WT02 Category 6A, 48 Port, Angled Patch Panel 2111573-1 Category 6A, Modular Jack, Orange 1933476-5 Category 6A, Modular Jack, Blue 1933476-6 Category 6A, Modular Jack, Black 1933476-2 Category 6A, Modular Jack, Yellow 1933476-8 Category 6A, Modular Jack, Green 1933476-9 Category 6, 48 Port, Angled Patch Panel 1375015-2 Category 6 Modula r Jack, Orange 1375055-5 Category 6 Modula r Jack, Blue 1375055-6 Category 6 Modula r Jack, Yellow 1375055-8 Category 6 Modula r Jack, Black 1375055-2 Category 6 Modula r Jack, Green 1375055-9 SL Series Multimedia Inserts, Almond Various Faceplate 4-Port, SG, Almond 558088-1 Faceplate 2-Port, SG, Almond 557505-1 Faceplate 4-Port, DG, Almond 83935-1 Corning LANscape Fiber Fan Out Kit 12 Pos/25 FAN-BT25-12 Wall Mount Housing F-12 WCH-12P WCH-12P 6P Panel Rack CCH SC SM CCH-CP12-59 CCH-CP12-59 LANscape Wall Mount Splice Housing WSH-16SPT WSH-16SPT Splice Protection Heat Shrink (pkg-50) 2806031-01 Unicam ST MM 95-000-50 95-000-50 Fiber 48F SM LT Altos 048EU4-T4701D20

29

24/96-F Rack Mnt Enclosure CCH-02U CCH-02U 12/48-F Rack Mount Enclosure CCH-01U Fiber 48-F MIC SM Plenum 048E88-61131-29 Connector Splice Housing CSH-05U CSH-05U SM / MM Splice Tray M67-048 M67-048 Corning Splice Tray/12 - M67-060 M67-060 Fiber Enclosure BGE LANScape EDC-06P-N H EDC-06P-NH Wall Mount Splice Cabine t WCH-SSH-4-12 WCH-SSH-4-12 Wall Mount Connec tor Housing WCH-04P WCH-04P Closet Connector Housing, 12 Panel CCH-04U FUSELITE SC SM BLUE PRE-POLISHED FERRULE AS236342 Fiber 96F SM Altos 096EU4-T4101D20 MIC SM PVC Fiber Optic cable 012E81-33131-24 Fiber Clean Wipes FC-45-1 Chatsworth Products Inc.

UNIVERSAL CABLE RUNWAY, Black, 12 inch wide 10250-712 Butt-Splice Kit, Black 16301-701 Intelligent Fan Kit, For ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabinet 13051-001 G3 Double -Sided Cable Managers 35523-701 G3 Combination Vertical Cable Managers 35573-701 Universa l Rack, 7' high, 19", Black 46353-701 Evolution Horizonta l Cable Manager, 2U, Black 35441-700 ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabine t, Beige 13050-222 Intelligent Fan Kit, For ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabinet 13051-000 G3 Double -Sided Cable Managers 35523-702 G3 Combination Vertical Cable Managers 35573-702 Universa l Rack, 7' high, 19", Black 46352-702 Evolution Horizonta l Cable Manager, 2U, Black 35441-701 ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabine t, Beige 13050-223 Intelligent Fan Kit, For ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabinet 13051-001 G3 Double -Sided Cable Managers 35523-703 G3 Combination Vertical Cable Managers 35573-703 Universa l Rack, 7' high, 19", Black 46352-703 Evolution Horizonta l Cable Manager, 2U, Black 35441-702

30

Appendix B – Typical ER, TR and Classroom Room Layouts

New

Mexic

oS

tate

Un

ivers

ity

31

New MexicoState University

FLOOR PLAN

INTERIOR ELEVATION

32


33


34

END OF DIVISION 27

PROJECT MANUAL - Facilities & Services · 2019. 12. 12. · DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000...

Documents

Transcript of PROJECT MANUAL - Facilities & Services · 2019. 12. 12. · DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000...